LMV36... AGM60...

LMV36.520A1 / AGM60.4A9

Basic unit with integrated fuel-air ratio control for

forced draft burners

Basic Documentation

The LMV36... / AGM60... and this Basic Documentation are intended for OEMs which integrate the units in
their products!

Software version
V03.30

CC1P7544en
15.10.2010 Building Technologies Division
Industry Sector
2/242

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 15.10.2010
 Supplementary documentation
User Documentation Modbus AZL2... .....................................................................A7541
Environmental Product Declaration LMV2… / LMV3...............................................E7541
Installation and Operating Instructions PC Software ACS410................................. J7352
Product Range Overview LMV2… / LMV3... .......................................................... Q7541

3/242

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 15.10.2010
4/242

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 15.10.2010
 Contents
1 Safety notes ................................................................................................. 13
1.1 Warning notes ............................................................................................... 13
1.2 Mounting notes .............................................................................................. 15
1.2.1 LMV36... ........................................................................................................ 15
− Notes on mounting ............................................................................ 15
1.2.2 AGM60... ....................................................................................................... 16
− Notes for mounting............................................................................ 16
− Mounting method .............................................................................. 16

1.3 Installation notes............................................................................................ 17

1.3.1 Use of the AGM60... ...................................................................................... 18
1.4 Electrical connections of LMV36... and AGM60... ......................................... 18
1.4.1 LMV36... ........................................................................................................ 18
1.4.2 AGM60... ....................................................................................................... 19
1.5 Electrical connection of flame detectors ........................................................ 19
1.6 Commissioning notes .................................................................................... 20
− Fuel-air ratio control system............................................................. 20
− Basic unit section .............................................................................. 20

1.7 Notes on settings and parameter settings ..................................................... 22

1.8 Standards and certificates ............................................................................. 23
1.9 Service notes................................................................................................. 23
1.10 Life cycle........................................................................................................ 23
− LMV36............................................................................................... 23
− AGM60... ........................................................................................... 23
− General ............................................................................................. 23

1.11 Disposal notes ............................................................................................... 23

2 Makeup of structure / function description............................................... 24

2.1 LMV36... ........................................................................................................ 24
2.2 For North American ....................................................................................... 24
2.3 General information ....................................................................................... 25
2.4 AGM60... ....................................................................................................... 26
2.4.1 Electrical connections of fuel actuators ......................................................... 26
2.4.2 Continuous operation .................................................................................... 27
2.4.3 Fuel changeover............................................................................................ 27
2.4.4 Extra fuel selector.......................................................................................... 27

3 Type summary ............................................................................................. 28

3.1 LMV36... ........................................................................................................ 28
3.2 AGM60... ....................................................................................................... 28
3.3 Fuel selector .................................................................................................. 28

4 Technical data.............................................................................................. 29
4.1 LMV36... basic unit ........................................................................................ 29
4.1.1 Terminal loading Inputs ................................................................................. 29
4.1.2 Terminal loading Outputs .............................................................................. 30
4.1.3 Analog output / load output X74.3 ................................................................. 30
4.1.4 Cable lengths................................................................................................. 31

5/242

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector Contents 15.10.2010
 4.1.5 Cross-sectional areas ....................................................................................31
4.2 Signal cable AGV50... from AZL2... → BCI ...................................................32
4.3 Environmental conditions...............................................................................32
4.4 Flame detectors .............................................................................................33
4.4.1 Ionization probe .............................................................................................33
4.4.2 UV flame detectors QRA2… / QRA4.U / QRA10… .......................................34
4.4.3 Photoresistive flame detectors QRB… ..........................................................35
4.5 Switch unit AGM60... .....................................................................................36
4.5.1 Terminal output Inputs ...................................................................................37
4.5.2 Terminal output Outputs ................................................................................37
4.5.3 Cable lengths .................................................................................................38
4.5.4 Cross-sectional areas ....................................................................................38
4.5.5 Electrical connections of actuators ................................................................38
4.5.6 Environmental conditions...............................................................................38

5 Dimensions...................................................................................................39
5.1 LMV36............................................................................................................39
5.2 AGM60...........................................................................................................40

6 Basic unit......................................................................................................41
6.1 Description of inputs and outputs...................................................................41
− Flame signal input and flame detector X10–05 and X10–06 ................41
6.2 Flame detectors .............................................................................................42
6.2.1 Loss of flame..................................................................................................43
6.2.2 Extraneous light .............................................................................................43
6.2.3 No flame at the end of safety time (TSA).......................................................43
6.2.4 Flame intensity...............................................................................................44
6.2.5 Supervision of flame detector ........................................................................44
6.3 Digital inputs ..................................................................................................45
6.3.1 Safety loop X3–04 (optional pressure switch-max (Pmax)), terminals 1
and 2 ..............................................................................................................45
6.3.2 (Burner flange) X3–03, terminals 1 and 2 ......................................................46
6.3.3 Input for external controller (ON / OFF) X5–03, terminal 1 ............................46
6.3.4 Air pressure switch (APS) X3–02...................................................................47
6.3.5 Pressure switch for gas valve proving (P LT) X9-04......................................48
6.3.6 Gas pressure switch-min (Pmin), start release gas X5–01............................49
6.3.7 Oil pressure switch-min (Pmin) X9-04 (X5–01 on AGM60...) ........................50
6.3.8 Setting the time for checking the pressure switch..........................................51
6.3.9 Gas / oil pressure switch-max (Pmax) / or POC contact, start release
oil X5–02 ........................................................................................................52
6.3.10 Fuel selection.................................................................................................55
6.3.11 Reset X8-04, terminal 1 .................................................................................55
6.4 Digital outputs ................................................................................................56
6.4.1 Output alarm type No-SI X3–05, terminal 2 ...................................................56
6.4.2 Fan motor contactor type SI X3–05, terminal 1 .............................................56
6.4.3 Fan continuous purging X3–05, terminal 3 ....................................................56
6.4.4 Output ignition (Z) type SI (IGNITION) X4–02 ...............................................57
6.4.5 Outputs fuel valves type SI (V1...V3 / PV) X8–02, X7-01, X7-02...................58
6.4.6 Output safety valve (SV) type SI X6–03 / magnetic clutch ............................60

6/242

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector Contents 15.10.2010
 6.4.7 Output for indication of operation X8-04 terminal 2 ....................................... 60
6.5 Program sequence ........................................................................................ 61
6.5.1 Time parameters ........................................................................................... 61
6.5.2 Valve proving................................................................................................. 63
6.5.3 Valve proving with separate pressure switch (P LT) X9-04........................... 64
6.5.4 Valve proving via gas pressure switch-min X5-01......................................... 65
6.5.4.1. Lockout phase (phase 00) ............................................................................. 65
6.5.4.2. Safety phase (phase 02) ............................................................................... 66
6.5.5 Special functions during the program sequence ........................................... 67
6.5.5.1. Reset / manual lockout .................................................................................. 67
6.5.5.2. Alarm upon prevention of startup .................................................................. 69
6.5.5.3. Possible preventions of startup ..................................................................... 69
6.5.5.4. Repetition counter ......................................................................................... 70
6.5.5.5. Start without prepurging (as per EN 676) ...................................................... 72
6.5.5.6. Gas shortage program................................................................................... 73
6.5.5.7. Program stop function ................................................................................... 74
6.5.5.8. Forced intermittent operation (<24 hours) ..................................................... 74
6.5.5.9. Low-fire shutdown ......................................................................................... 74
6.5.5.10. Continuous fan .............................................................................................. 75
6.5.5.11. Test function for burner approval – loss-of-flame test (TÜV test).................. 76
6.6 Fuel trains (application examples)................................................................. 77
− Gas direct ignition ............................................................................. 77
− (Operating mode 1, 7, 14, 19) ........................................................... 77
− Gas pilot ignition 1............................................................................. 77
− (Operating mode 2, 8, 15, 20) ........................................................... 77
− Gas pilot ignition 2............................................................................. 77
− (Operating mode 3, 9, 16, 21) ........................................................... 77
− Fuel valve control program................................................................ 77
− Light oil direct ignition, multistage ..................................................... 78
− (Operating mode 5, 17) ..................................................................... 78
− (Operating mode 5, 17) ..................................................................... 78
− (Operating mode 6, 18) ..................................................................... 78
− Light oil direct ignition, modulating .................................................... 79
− (Operating mode 4, 22) ..................................................................... 79
− (Operating mode 4, 22) ..................................................................... 79
− Fuel valve control program................................................................ 79
− Dual fuel burner gas/ light oil with gas pilot ignition (Operating mode
3, 9, 16, 21) (Operating mode 10, 11).................................. 80
− Fuel valve control program................................................................ 80
− Light oil direct ignition modulating with 2 fuel valves......................... 81
− (Operating mode 12) ......................................................................... 81
− (Operating mode 12) ......................................................................... 81
− Fuel valve control program................................................................ 81
− Dual fuel burner gas / light oil with gas pilot ignition with 2 fuel valves
(Operating mode 3, 9, 16, 21) (Operating mode 13)............. 82
− Fuel valve control program................................................................ 82

6.7 Sequence diagrams....................................................................................... 83

6.7.1 Gas direct ignition «G», «G mod», «G mod pneu» ....................................... 84
6.7.2 Gas pilot ignition 1 «Gp1», «Gp1 mod», «Gp1 mod pneu»........................... 85
6.7.3 Gas pilot ignition 2 «Gp2», «Gp2 mod», «Gp2 mod pneu»........................... 86
6.7.4 Light oil direct ignition «Lo», «Lo mod», «Lo 2-stage», «Lo 3-stage» ........... 87

7/242

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector Contents 15.10.2010
 6.7.5 Light oil pilot ignition «Lo Gp»........................................................................88
6.7.6 Legend to sequence diagrams.......................................................................89
6.7.7 Legend to the sequence diagrams.................................................................89

7 AGM60...........................................................................................................91
7.1 System with AGM60... and one fuel actuator.................................................91
7.2 System with AGM60... and two fuel actuators ...............................................91
7.3 Connecting cable between AGM60... and LMV36... basic unit (AGV61.100
cable) .............................................................................................................92

8 Selection of operating mode.......................................................................93

8.1 Deleting curves ..............................................................................................95

9 Connection to load controllers...................................................................96

9.1 Controller-on contact X5-03, terminal 1 .........................................................96
9.2 Load controller via BAC system X92 .............................................................96
9.3 Manual output ................................................................................................98
9.4 Output with curve settings..............................................................................98
9.5 External load controller via analog input X64.1 / X64.2 .................................99
− Switching thresholds / minimum positioning step..................................99
9.5.1 Thresholds for modulating operation .............................................................99
9.5.2 Switching thresholds for multistage operation .............................................100
9.6 Prioritization of power sources.....................................................................101
9.6.1 Emergency operation with several load controllers .....................................101

10 Electronic fuel-air ratio control.................................................................102

10.1 General ........................................................................................................102
10.2 Behavior outside the operating positions .....................................................102
10.2.1 Traveling speed ...........................................................................................102
10.2.2 Home position ..............................................................................................102
10.2.3 Prepurging ...................................................................................................103
10.2.4 Ignition .........................................................................................................103
10.2.5 Postpurging..................................................................................................103
10.3 Modulating operation ...................................................................................104
10.3.1 Definition of curves ......................................................................................104
10.3.2 Traveling speed/maximum curve slope .......................................................105
10.3.3 Entering the running position .......................................................................105
10.3.4 Operating position........................................................................................105
10.3.5 Limitation of modulation range.....................................................................106
10.3.6 Setting the minimum and maximum output..................................................107
10.4 Multistage operation.....................................................................................108
10.4.1 Definition of curves ......................................................................................108
10.4.2 Traveling speed ...........................................................................................108
10.4.3 Adjustment of output ....................................................................................109
10.4.4 Entering the operating position ....................................................................109
10.4.5 Operating position........................................................................................109
10.4.6 Limitation of modulation range.....................................................................110
10.5 End of operating position .............................................................................110
10.6 Notes on settings and parameter settings ...................................................111

8/242

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector Contents 15.10.2010
 11 Actuators X53 / X54 ................................................................................... 112
11.1 Function principle ........................................................................................ 112
11.2 Definition of angles ...................................................................................... 112
11.3 Referencing ................................................................................................. 113
11.3.1 Reference run.............................................................................................. 114
− Reference travel type 1 ................................................................... 114
− Reference travel type 2 ................................................................... 114

11.4 Direction of rotation ..................................................................................... 116

11.5 Monitoring the actuator positions................................................................. 117
11.6 Changing the error detection band for monitoring the actuator positions.... 119
11.7 Forced travel................................................................................................ 119
11.8 Detection of line interruptions ...................................................................... 119
11.9 Protection against mixup of actuators ......................................................... 120
11.9.1 Proposal for implementation........................................................................ 120

12 Fan control ................................................................................................. 121

12.1 Function principle ........................................................................................ 121
12.2 Activation of VSD/PWM fan......................................................................... 121
12.3 VSD control X74.3 ....................................................................................... 122
12.4 PWM fan control X64.3................................................................................ 123
12.5 Safe separation of mains voltage and protective extra low-voltage ............ 123
12.6 Ramp time ................................................................................................... 123
− For VSD operation .............................................................................. 123
12.7 Acquisition of speed .................................................................................... 124
12.7.1 Acquisition of speed with proximity switch................................................... 124
− Speed input X74.4 .............................................................................. 124
12.7.2 Acquisition of speed with Hall generator ..................................................... 125
12.8 Speed control .............................................................................................. 126
12.9 Speed supervision ....................................................................................... 126
12.10 Setting the parameters of the VSD.............................................................. 127
12.11 Standardization of speed............................................................................. 128
− Automatic speed standardization........................................................ 128
12.12 Control of fan motor with pneumatic fuel-air ratio control ............................ 130
12.13 EMC of LMV36... and VSD.......................................................................... 131
12.14 Description of connection terminals............................................................. 132
12.14.1 VSD ............................................................................................................. 132
12.14.2 PWM fan...................................................................................................... 132

13 Load output X74.3 ..................................................................................... 133

13.1 Safe separation of mains voltage and extra low-voltage ............................ 133
13.2 Modulating operation ................................................................................... 133
13.3 2-stage operation......................................................................................... 133
13.4 3-stage operation......................................................................................... 134

14 Fuel meter input X75.1 / X75.2.................................................................. 135

14.1 Configuration of fuel meter .......................................................................... 135
14.1.1 Types of fuel meters .................................................................................... 135

9/242

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector Contents 15.10.2010
 14.1.2 Configuration of pulses per volume unit.......................................................135
14.1.3 Reading and resetting the meter readings...................................................135
14.2 Fuel throughput............................................................................................136
14.2.1 Configuration................................................................................................136
14.2.2 Reading out the fuel throughput...................................................................136

15 Connection and internal diagram.............................................................137

16 Special feature: Burner identification (ID) ...............................................139

17 Connection to superposed systems ........................................................139

17.1 General information and building automation functions...............................139
17.2 Modbus ........................................................................................................141

18 PC software ACS410..................................................................................142

19 Error history ...............................................................................................143

19.1 Error classes ................................................................................................143
19.2 Makeup of error history ................................................................................144
− Deleting the error history .................................................................144

20 Lifecycle function ......................................................................................145

21 Safety notes on use of the AZL2... ...........................................................145

22 Operating the AZL2... unit .........................................................................146

22.1 Description of unit/display and buttons ........................................................146
22.2 Meaning of symbols on the display..............................................................147
22.3 Brightness of display....................................................................................147
22.4 Special functions..........................................................................................148
22.4.1 Manual lockout.............................................................................................148
22.4.2 Manual control (manual request for output) .................................................148
22.5 Timeout for menu operation.........................................................................149
22.6 Backup / restore...........................................................................................150
22.6.1 Backup .........................................................................................................151
22.6.2 Restore ........................................................................................................153

23 Operation of basic unit via the AZL2... ....................................................155

23.1 Normal display .............................................................................................155
23.1.1 Display in standby mode..............................................................................155
23.1.2 Display during startup / shutdown................................................................155
23.1.2.1. Display of program phases ..........................................................................155
23.1.2.2. Display of program phase with remaining running time until end of the
phase is reached..........................................................................................155
23.1.2.3. List of phase displays...................................................................................156
23.1.3 Display of operating position........................................................................156
23.1.4 Fault status messages, display of errors and info........................................157
23.1.4.1. Display of errors (faults) with lockout ...........................................................157
23.1.4.2. Reset............................................................................................................157
23.1.4.3. Activating info / service mode from lockout..................................................157
23.1.4.4. Error with safety shutdown...........................................................................158
23.1.4.5. General information .....................................................................................158

10/242

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector Contents 15.10.2010
 23.1.4.6. Prevention of startup ................................................................................... 158
23.1.4.7. Safety loop................................................................................................... 158

24 Menu-driven operation.............................................................................. 159

24.1 Assignment of levels.................................................................................... 159

25 Info level ..................................................................................................... 160

25.1 Display of info level...................................................................................... 162
25.2 Display of info values (examples)................................................................ 162
25.2.1 Identification date ........................................................................................ 162
25.2.2 Identification number ................................................................................... 162
25.2.3 Burner identification..................................................................................... 163
25.2.4 Number of startups resettable ..................................................................... 163
25.2.5 Total number of startups.............................................................................. 164
25.2.6 End of info level ........................................................................................... 164

26 Service level............................................................................................... 165

26.1 Display of service level ................................................................................ 165
26.2 Display of service values (example) ............................................................ 166
26.2.1 Number of faults .......................................................................................... 166
26.2.2 Error history ................................................................................................. 166
26.2.3 Intensity of flame ......................................................................................... 166
26.2.4 End of service level ..................................................................................... 166

27 Parameter level .......................................................................................... 167

27.1 Entry of password........................................................................................ 168
27.2 Entry of burner identification........................................................................ 170
27.3 Change of heating engineer’s password ..................................................... 171
27.4 Change of OEM’s password........................................................................ 172
27.5 Use of parameter level ................................................................................ 172
27.6 Structure of parameter levels ...................................................................... 173
27.7 Parameters without index, with direct display.............................................. 174
27.7.1 Using the example of parameter 208: Program stop................................... 174
27.8 Parameters without index, with no direct display (with parameters having a
value range >5 digits) .................................................................................. 176
27.8.1 Using the example of parameter 162: Operating hours resettable.............. 176
27.9 Parameter with index, with direct display .................................................... 178
27.9.1 Using the example of parameter 501: No-flame positions fuel actuator...... 178
27.10 Parameters with index, with no direct display.............................................. 180
27.10.1 Using the example of parameter 701: Errors............................................... 180
27.11 Fuel-air ratio curves – settings and commissioning..................................... 183
27.11.1 Initial commissioning ................................................................................... 183
27.11.2 Setting curvepoints P0 and P9 for modulating operation («G mod»,
«Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod» and «Lo mod»).................................................... 186
27.11.3 Setting curvepoints P0 and P9 for «G mod pneu», «Gp1 mod pneu»
and «Gp2 mod pneu».................................................................................. 187
27.11.4 Warm settings for modulating operation («G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2
mod» and «Lo mod») .................................................................................. 188

11/242

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector Contents 15.10.2010
 27.11.5 Warm settings for modulating mode («G mod pneu», «Gp1 mod pneu»
and «Gp2 mod pneu») .................................................................................193
27.11.6 Cold settings for «G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod» and «Lo mod»..........193
27.11.7 Cold settings for «G mod pneu», «Gp1 mod pneu» and «Gp2 mod
pneu» ...........................................................................................................193
27.11.8 Interpolation of curvepoints..........................................................................194
27.11.9 Interpolating the curvepoints........................................................................195
27.11.10 Setting of curvepoints for multistage mode («Lo 2-stage» and «Lo 3-
stage») .........................................................................................................198
27.11.11 Warm settings for «Lo 2-stage» and «Lo 3-stage»......................................199
27.11.12 Cold settings for multistage mode («Lo 2-stage» and «Lo 3-stage») ..........203
27.11.13 Intensity of flame during curve settings........................................................203

28 Parameter list LMV36.................................................................................204

29 Error code list.............................................................................................224

30 Revision history of basic unit LMV36... ...................................................239

− Software changes ...............................................................................239

31 List of figures .............................................................................................240

12/242

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector Contents 15.10.2010
 1 Safety notes
1.1 Warning notes
To avoid injury to persons, damage to property or the environment, the following
warning notes must be observed!

LMV36... basic unit and AGM60... switch unit are safety devices! Do not open, in-
terfere with or modify the units. Siemens does not assume responsibility for dam-
age resulting from unauthorized interference!

Inside of this documentation are warning notes which also be must observed!

After commissioning and after each service visit, check the flue gas values
across the entire load range!

The present Basic Documentation describes a wide choice of applications and functions
and shall serve as a guideline. The correct functioning of the units must be checked and
proven by function checks on a test rig or on the plant itself!

• All activities (mounting, installation and service work, etc.) must be performed by
qualified personnel
• Degree of protection IP40 as per DIN EN 60529 for the basic unit must be ensured
through adequate mounting of the LMV36... basic unit and the AGM60... switch unit
by the burner or boiler manufacturer
• Before making any wiring changes in the connection area, completely isolate the
plant from mains supply (all-polar disconnection). Ensure that the plant cannot be
inadvertently switched on and that it is indeed dead. If not disconnected, there is a
risk of electric shock hazard
• Protection against electric shock hazard on the LMV36..., the AGM60... and on all
connected electrical components must be ensured through adequate mounting. In
terms of design, stability and protection, the cover used must conform to EN 60730
• After each activity (mounting, installation and service work, etc.), check to ensure
that wiring is in an orderly state and that the parameters are correctly set
• Fall or shock can adversely affect the safety functions. Such units must not be put
into operation even if they do not exhibit any damage
• When programming the air-fuel ratio control curves, the commissioning engineer
must constantly watch the quality of the combustion process (e.g. by means of a
flue gas analyzer) and, in the event of poor combustion values or dangerous condi-
tions, take appropriate actions, e.g. by shutting down the system manually
• When starting up a dual-fuel burner, both fuel trains must be put into full opera-
tion, thus making certain that fuel changeover by the user cannot lead to critical
conditions
• The inputs and outputs of the AGM60... may only be used for the application
covered by this document and only in connection with the sensors and actua-
tors specified for the application, the reason being that only these have been
checked and released in terms of error effects. If you want to use the sensors
and actuators on other applications, please contact Siemens
• The following plug-on terminations carry FELV (functional extra low-voltage) (also
refer to chapter Electrical connection of LMV36... and AGM60...), thus ensuring
adequate separation from mains voltage:
- BCI (X56) for the connecting cable of AZL2... or PC tool ACS410
- COM (X92) for accessories, such as the OCI410...
- Plug-on terminations for actuators (X54) or for the AGV61.100 connecting cable
when using 2 fuel actuators via AGM60...
These plug-on terminations may be disconnected or exchanged only when the plant
is dead (all-polar disconnection)
• The plugs of the connecting cables for the LMV36… or other accessories, such as
the OCI410... interface (plugged into the BCI), may be removed or exchanged only
when the plant is shut down (all-polar disconnection), since the BCI does not pro-
vide safe separation from mains voltage.

13/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 1 Safety notes 15.10.2010
 • The connection for the SQM3… or SQN1... actuators does not provide safe separa-
tion from mains voltage. Prior to connecting or changing one of these actuators, the
plant must be shut down (all-polar disconnection)
• When setting up a system with the AGM60..., check to ensure that the sensors and
actuators are correctly assigned to fuels

To ensure safety and reliability of the LMV36... and the AGM60..., the following points
must also be observed:
- Condensation and ingress of humidity must be avoided. Should such conditions oc-
cur, make sure that the unit is completed dry before switching on again!
- Static charges must be avoided since they can damage the unit’s electronic compo-
nents when touched.
Recommendation: Use ESD equipment
- If the unit fuse was blown due to overload or a short-circuit at the connection termi-
nals, the LMV36... must be replaced since the switching contacts could have been
damaged

14/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 1 Safety notes 15.10.2010
 1.2 Mounting notes
• Ensure that the relevant national safety regulations and regulations relating to stan-
dards are complied with
• In geographical areas where DIN regulations apply, the requirements of VDE must
be satisfied, especially DIN / VDE 0100, 0550 and DIN / VDE 0722

1.2.1 LMV36...

• The LMV36... basic unit must be secured with fixing screws M4 (UNC32) or M5
(UNC24), observing a maximum tightening torque of 1.8 Nm and using all 4 fixing
points. Additional mounting surfaces on the housing are provided to improve me-
chanical stability. These must completely rest on the mounting surface to which the
unit is secured. The flatness of that mounting surface must be within a tolerance
band of 0.3 mm
• Touch protection of the external fuel selector must be ensured by fitting the selector
as a separate component (e.g. in a control panel door or under the burner hood)

Notes on mounting 0,3

(103.5) Outer contour of housing

M5 x 4

122
Additional mounting
surfaces
6.5

Bild 365./0409
103.5 10

217

Figure 1: LMV36... note on mounting

15/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 1 Safety notes 15.10.2010
 1.2.2 AGM60...
101 69
Notes for mounting M4 (4x)

6,5
x)
10 (2

97
110

85

Bild 258e/0309

0,3

Figure 2: AGM60... note for mounting

Mounting method Screwed On a DIN rail

A = mounting B = removal

Mounting on DIN rails requires a

mounting clip!

If the unit is screwed on, following must be observed:

• The AGM60… switch unit must be secured with fixing screws M4 (UNC32), observ-
ing a maximum tightening torque of 1.8 Nm and using all 4 fixing points
• The additional mounting surfaces on the housing must be used; they are provided
to improve mechanical stability and must fully rest on the mounting surface. The
flatness of the mounting surface must be within a tolerance band of 0.3 mm

16/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 1 Safety notes 15.10.2010
 1.3 Installation notes
• Always run the high-voltage ignition cables separate from the unit and other cables
while observing the greatest possible distances
• Ensure that the electrical wiring inside the boiler is in compliance with national and
local safety regulations
• Mains power must always be supplied via L and N. This means that no potential dif-
ferential must exist between the neutral conductor N and protective earth PE
• Phase and neutral conductor must not be interchanged (dangerous malfunctions,
loss of protection against electric shock hazard, etc.)
• Make certain that strain relief of the connected cables is in compliance with the re-
levant standards (e.g. as per DIN EN 60730 and DIN EN 60335)
• Ensure that spliced wires cannot get into contact with neighboring terminals. Use
adequate ferrules
• Run the high-voltage ignition cable completely separate from all other cables
• The burner manufacturer must protect unused terminals of LMV36... and AGM60...
by fitting dummy plugs (exception: X64 (reserved) and X74)
• When making the wiring, ensure that the AC 120 V sections is strictly separated
from other voltage sections, thus ensuring protection against electric shock hazard
(for more detailed information, refer to chapter Electrical connection of LMV36... and
AGM60...)
• The plugs of connecting line for the LMV36…, must be connected or disconnected
only when the plant is dead (all-polar disconnection), since the BCI does not ensure
safe separation from mains voltage
• AGV50... signal cable from LMV36... and AZL2...
Since the BCI carries FELV (refer to chapter Electrical connection of LMV36... and
AGM60...), use of the AGV50… signal cable for connection from the LMV36... to the
AZL2... is mandatory, or observe the respective specification. The cable is specified
for use under the burner hood. When using other types of cable that do not conform
to the specification, protection against electric shock hazard is not necessarily en-
sured
• Do not lay signal cable AGV50... from the LMV36... to the AZL2... together with
other cables
• Service operation with a longer signal cable from the LMV36...:
If a longer signal cable is required for service work for example (short-time usage,
<24 hours), note that the above application under the burner hood no longer applies
and, for this reason, the signal cable can be subjected to increased mechanical
stress. In that case, use a reinforced signal cable
• Both the AGV50... signal cable and the AZL2... must be shipped and stored so that
no damage due to dust and water can occur when the products are used in the field
• To ensure protection against electric shock hazard, make certain that – prior to
switching on power – the AGV50... signal cable is correctly connected to the AZL2...
• The AZL2... must be used in a dry and clean environment
• The connection between the actuators and the regulating units for fuel and com-
bustion air or any other regulating units must be form-fitted

17/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 1 Safety notes 15.10.2010
 1.3.1 Use of the AGM60...

• To ensure correct fuel changeover, output Safety valve (SV) / magnetic clutch
(X6-03.3) must be connected to the respective input of the AGM60... (X32-
01.5), the reason being the following:
Depending on the signal level at this output, the AGM60... sends the point in
time for fuel changeover to the LMV36...
Caution!
• The AGM60... must always be powered via the LMV36... basic unit and never di-
rectly by mains voltage
• The live conductor for fuel changeover (refer to chapter Fuel changeover) must al-
ways be picked up at terminal X31-01.4 of the AGM60…
• Connecting cable between LMV36... and AGM60... (also refer to chapter Makeup of
system): Use of this connecting cable is mandatory (available as an accessory item,
refer to chapter Type summary)

1.4 Electrical connections of LMV36... and

AGM60...
For LMV36... and AGM60..., the following low-voltage categories are in use:
• SELV (safety extra low-voltage) and PELV (protective extra low-voltage) ensure
protection against electric shock hazard
• FELV (functional extra low-voltage)
Functional extra low-voltage without safe separation provides no protection, so that
risk would not be excluded in the event of failure

1.4.1 LMV36...
Mains voltage
FELV
SELV
PELV

Mains voltage

Figure 3: LMV36... electrical connection

& Note
The safety class of the connected components determines whether SELV or PELV
applies. In the case of PELV, the respective component is earthed and connected to
protective earth.

18/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 1 Safety notes 15.10.2010
 1.4.2 AGM60...
Mains voltage

Mains voltage FELV

Figure 4: AGM60... electrical connection

When installing the unit, make certain that non-insulated parts in the mounting frame do
not get into contact with the connection terminals. Also observe the lateral connecting
area:

Bild 263e/0309

Lateral connecting area

Figure 5: AGM60... lateral connecting area

1.5 Electrical connection of flame detectors

It is important to achieve practically disturbance- and loss-free signal transmission:
• Never run the detector cables together with other cables
– Line capacitance reduces the magnitude of the flame signal
– Use a separate cable
• Observe the permissible detector cable lengths
• The mains-powered ionization probe is not protected against electric shock hazard.
It must be protected against accidental contact
• Earth the burner in compliance with the relevant regulations; earthing the boiler
alone does not suffice
• Locate the ignition electrode and the ionization probe such that the ignition spark
cannot arc over to the ionization probe (risk of electrical overloads)

19/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 1 Safety notes 15.10.2010
 1.6 Commissioning notes
• When commissioning the unit, check all safety functions
• There is no absolute protection against incorrect use of the RASTx connectors. For
this reason, prior to commissioning the plant, check the correct assignment of all
connectors
• Electromagnetic emissions must be checked on an application-specific basis

After the plant has been installed and commissioned, the person responsible for the
plant / heating engineer must document the parameterized values and settings (e.g.
curve characteristics) used for fuel-air ratio control.
These data can be printed out with the help of the ACS410 PC software, for example, or
must be written down.
This document must be kept in a safe place and checked by the expert.

Caution!
On the OEM level of the LMV36..., parameter settings other than those specified
in the application standards can be made. For this reason, check whether the
parameter settings made are in compliance with the relevant application stan-
dards (e.g. EN 298, EN 230, EN 676, EN 267, etc.), or whether the respective
plant demands special approval!

Fuel-air ratio The selected setting values of fuel and combustion air must be assigned such that –
control system while giving consideration to the combustion chamber / fuel pressure, temperature and
combustion air pressure, as well as wear of actuators and controlling elements, etc. –
correct operation with sufficient amounts of excess air is ensured across the burner’s full
output range for an extensive period of time (until the next regular inspection is due; also
refer to chapter Monitoring the positions). This must be proven by the burner / boiler
manufacturer by measuring the characteristic combustion process values. If the stan-
dardization process is repeated, the fuel-air ratio control system must be rechecked.

Basic unit section Prior to commissioning the system, the following points must be checked:
• Parameterization of operating mode (e.g. «G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Lo mod», etc.)
must accord with the type of burner used (refer to chapter Selection of operating
mode)
• Correct assignment of the valves to the valve outputs of the LMV36...
• Correct setting of the time parameters, especially the safety and prepurge times
• Correct functioning of the flame detector in the event of loss of flame during opera-
tion (including the response time), with extraneous light, during the prepurge time
and, when there is no establishment of flame, at the end of the safety time
• Activation of the valve proving function and determination of the correct leakage
rate, if required by the application (refer to chapter Valve proving)

20/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 1 Safety notes 15.10.2010
 The functions of the following available or required input status signals must be check-
ed:
• Air pressure
• Minimum gas pressure / maximum gas pressure or POC
• Gas pressure valve proving
• Minimum oil pressure and maximum oil pressure
• Safety loop (e.g. safety limiter)

Duties of the expert when making the approval tests

Action Check / response

a) Burner startup with flame detector Lockout at the end of safety time 1 (TSA1)
darkened
b) Burner startup with flame detector exposed to ex- Lockout at prepurge time (t1)
traneous light, e.g. to incandescent light with detec-
tors for visible radiation, quartz-halogen bulb or
cigarette lighter flame with detectors for UV radia-
tion
c) Simulation of loss of flame during operation. For Lockout or restart, depending on the basic unit’s con-
that, darken the flame detector in the operating po- figuration
sition and maintain that state
d) Check the plant’s response time with loss of flame Turning off power to the valves by the basic unit within
during operation. For that purpose, manually dis- the period of time permitted for the respective type of
connect the fuel valves from power and check the plant
time from this moment the basic unit requires to turn
off power to the valve
e) Check the safe operation of the burner while giving System tolerances are the result of a number of factors,
consideration to system tolerances such as:
- Tolerances of actuators plus mechanical linkage to
the controlling elements
- Environmental conditions
(temperature, air conditions)
- Type of fuel (calorific value / pressure)
- Type of supply air path and flue ways

Example of procedure for checking the burner’s re-

sponse to actuator tolerances:
- Approach a output point in programming mode (e.g.
low-fire or high-fire)
- Change the actuator’s position against the optimum
fuel-air ratio setting as can be expected in the case
of tolerances
- Check the flue gas values with a flue gas analyzer

Recommendation:
Make this readjustment against the optimum fuel-air ra-
tio setting for one actuator at a time!

Further checks may be required, depending on the field of use and the relevant stan-
dards.

21/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 1 Safety notes 15.10.2010
 1.7 Notes on settings and parameter settings
• When adjusting the electronic fuel-air ratio control system integrated in the
LMV36..., allow for sufficient amounts of excess air since – over a period of time –
the flue gas settings are affected by a number of factors (e.g. density of air, wear of
actuators and controlling elements, etc.). For this reason, the flue gas values initially
set must be checked at regular intervals
• To safeguard against inadvertent or unauthorized parameter transfer from the PC
software to the basic unit, the OEM must assign an individual burner identification
(ID) for each burner. Compliance with this regulation is mandatory to ensure that the
LMV36... system prevents the transfer of parameter sets of some other plant (with
inadequate and possibly dangerous parameter values) to the LMV36... system via
the PC tool. In addition, the fuel-air ratio control parameters must be manually ap-
proached and the combustion values checked
• With the LMV36... system, it is to be noted that the unit’s characteristics are deter-
mined primarily by the specific parameter settings rather than the type of unit. This
means that, among other things, each time a plant is commissioned, the parameter
settings must be checked and the LMV36... must not be transferred from one plant
to another without adapting the parameter settings to the new plant
• When using the ACS410 PC software, the safety notes given in the relevant Instal-
lation and Operating Instructions (J7352) must also be observed
• A password protects the parameter level against unauthorized access. The OEM al-
locates individual passwords to the setting levels he can access. The default pass-
words used by Siemens must be changed by the OEM. These passwords are confi-
dential and may only be given to persons authorized to access such setting levels
• The responsibility for setting the parameters lies with the person who – in accor-
dance with his access rights – made changes to the respective setting level

In particular, the OEM (burner and / or boiler manufacturer) assumes responsibil-

ity for the correct parameter settings in compliance with the standards covering
the specific applications (e.g. EN 676, EN 267, EN 1643, etc.).

22/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 1 Safety notes 15.10.2010
 1.8 Standards and certificates
Conformity to EEC directives
- Electromagnetic compatibility EMC (immunity) 2004/108/EC
- Directive for gas-fired appliances 90/396/EEC
- Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC
- Pressure equipment directive 97/23/EC

ISO 9001: 2010 ISO 14001: 2010

Cert. 00739 Cert. 38233

• Identification code as per EN 230 / EN 298, chapter 4 FT/MCLBB

1.9 Service notes

• If fuses are blown, the unit must be returned to Siemens (refer to chapter Warn-
ing notes)
• Error diagnostics can only be made via the LMV36... (BCI)

1.10 Life cycle

LMV36... The burner management system LMV36... has a designed lifetime* of 250,000 burner
startup cycles which, under normal operating conditions in heating mode, correspond to
approx. 10 years of usage (starting from the production date given on the type field).

AGM60... The AGM60... switch unit has a designed lifetime* of 5,000 burner startup cycles which,
under normal operating conditions in heating mode, correspond to approx.
10 years of usage (starting from the production date given on the type field).

General This lifetime is based on the endurance tests specified in EN 230 / EN 298 and the table
containing the relevant test documentation published by the European Association of
Component Manufacturers (Afecor) (www.afecor.org).

The designed lifetime is based on use of the LMV36... / AGM60... according to the
manufacturer’s Basic Documentation. When reaching the designed lifetime in terms of
the number of burner startup cycles or time of usage, the LMV36... / AGM60... must be
replaced by authorized personnel.

* The designed lifetime is not the warranty time specified in the Terms of Delivery

1.11 Disposal notes

The unit contains electrical and electronic components and must not be disposed of to-
gether with domestic waste. Local and currently valid legislation must be observe

23/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 1 Safety notes 15.10.2010
 2 Makeup of structure / function descrip-
tion
2.1 LMV36...
The LMV36... is a microprocessor-based burner management system with matching
system components for the control and supervision of forced draft burners of medium to
high capacity.

For using of dual fuel with 2 fuel actuators, AGM60... switch unit is required.

Following are integrated in the LMV36...:

• Burner management system complete with valve proving system
• Electronic fuel-air ratio control system for a maximum of 2 SQM3... or SQN1... ac-
tuators
• Control of VSD for air fan
• Modbus interface

Example: Dual fuel burner, gas modulating and oil 3-stage

2.2 For North American

For intermittent operation in connection with the LMV36…, / AGM60... the ionization
probe or the QRA... or QRB... optical flame detectors can be used. Continuous opera-
tion is possible only when using an ionization probe and without AGM60...

24/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 2 Makeup of structure / function description 15.10.2010
 2.3 General information
The burner management system is operated and parameterized either via the
AZL2... display and operating unit or with the help of the PC tool.
The AZL2... with LCD and menu-driven operation facilitates straightforward use and tar-
geted diagnostics. When making diagnostics, the display shows the operating states,
the type of error and the point in time the error occurred. Passwords protect the different
parameter levels of the burner / boiler manufacturer and heating engineer against unau-
thorized access. There is also a COM port which can be accessed from a superposed
system, such as a building automation and control system (BACS). A PC with ACS410
software can be connected via the BCI and OCI410… interface. Among other features,
the ACS410 software (for dual fuel burner → on request) affords convenient readout of
settings and operating states, parameterization of the LMV36..., and trend recordings.
The burner / boiler manufacturer can select from different types of fuel trains and make
use of a wide choice of individual parameter settings (program times, configuration of
inputs / outputs, etc.), enabling him to make optimum adaptations to the relevant appli-
cation. The actuators are driven by stepper motors and can be positioned with high
resolution. Specific features and actuator settings are defined by the LMV36... basic
unit.

25/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 2 Makeup of structure / function description 15.10.2010
 2.4 AGM60...
The AGM60… switch unit connected to the LMV36... serves for changeover of valve
control or for feedback signals from the 2 types of fuel. The signals are monitored by the
LMV36... basic unit (same as with the single-fuel variant) which, in the event of fault,
also triggers shutdown.

LMV... M Actuator air

Pressure input L Fuel valve outlets

N Fuel0 SA
PE Fuel1 Fuel

Fuel valve Fuel0

Pressure input Fuel0
Fuel valve Fuel1
AGM60...
Fuel actuator Fuel0
Pressure input Fuel1
Fuel actuator Fuel1
Bild 264e/0309

Fuel selection
Figure 6: AGM60... connected to the LMV36...

2.4.1 Electrical connections of fuel actuators

When using only 1 fuel actuator, it must be connected directly to the LMV36... In that
case, a connecting cable (AGV61.100) is not required.
When using 2 fuel actuators for each type, they must be connected to the AGM60...

Fuel selection choices:

- Gas / oil
- Gas / gas
- Oil / oil

When wiring the components, we recommend to make the following fuel assignments as
standard:
Fuel 0 = gas
Fuel 1 = oil
This can be set via parameter 201 / 301 (refer to chapter Selection of operating mode).

Following switching’s of inputs and outputs are made via AGM60...:

- Fuel at the LMV36...
- Fuel valve
- Pressure switch or POC
- Actuator (SQM3... or SQN1...)

26/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 2 Makeup of structure / function description 15.10.2010
 2.4.2 Continuous operation

The LMV36... basic unit together with the AGM60... is not approved for continuous op-
eration.

In the case of intermittent operation in connection with the LMV36..., an ionization probe
or flame detector QRA..., QRB... or QRC... can be used.

2.4.3 Fuel changeover

The fuel selection is made by an external connected switch at AGM60...

The changeover logic of the AGM60... generates feedback signals Fuel 0 and Fuel 1
which are fed to the LMV36... basic unit for evaluation.

& Note
Fuel changeover via the AZL2... or a BAC system is not technically possible.

LMV...
AGM60...
4
Internal fuel selection 0 1

X31-02
3

X5-03

0
Internal fuel selection 1 2 2

1
1

P
Bild 373e/0409

Figure 7: Fuel changeover

The next burner start after shutdown or safety shutdown takes place with the new type
of fuel.

After fuel changeover, any manually selected output or output called for by the BAC sys-
tem is cancelled and automatic operation is activated, thus enabling automatic restart
with the new fuel if there is a request for heat.

Exception:
The manual off function for manual output and burner off (output = 0) via the BAC sys-
tem are maintained.

Feedback signals Fuel 0 and Fuel 1 can also be used for manual reset and lockout (re-
fer to chapter Fuel selection / reset / lockout).

2.4.4 Extra fuel selector

AGM60...
Fuel PE
SWI
1
X31-01

N
L

Bild 266/0309

Figure 8: AGM60... extra fuel selector

27/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 2 Makeup of structure / function description 15.10.2010
 3 Type summary
3.1 LMV36...
Microprocessor-based basic unit for single-fuel burners of any capacity, with electronic
fuel-air ratio control, up to 2 actuators and integrated valve proving system.

Product no. Mains voltage Parameter set Flame detectors

LMV36.520A1 AC 120 V US QRA2… / QRA4.U / QRA10… /
QRB… / ION

3.2 AGM60...
The AGM60… switch unit is for connection to the LMV36... and used for change-
over of valve control and/or for handling feedback signals from the 2 types of fuel.

Product no. Mains voltage

AGM60.4A9 AC 120 V

3.3 Fuel selector

The fuel selector is not a component of the AGM60... and does not constitute part of
the scope of delivery.

28/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 3 Type summary 15.10.2010
 4 Technical data
4.1 LMV36... basic unit
Mains voltage AC 120 V -15 % / +10 %
Mains frequency 50 / 60 Hz ±6 %
Power consumption <30 W (typically)
Safety class I, with parts according to II and III to
DIN EN 60730-1
Degree of protection IP00

Note
The burner or boiler manufacturer must
ensure degree of protection IP40 for the
LMV36... as per DIN EN 60529 through
adequate installation

4.1.1 Terminal loading Inputs

• Perm. mains primary fuse Max. 16 AT

(externally)
• Unit fuse F1 (internally) 6.3 AT (DIN EN 60127 2 / 5)
• Mains supply: Input current depending on the operating state of the unit
Undervoltage
• Safety shutdown from operating Approx. AC 93 V
position at mains voltage
• Restart on rise in mains voltage Approx. AC 95 V
Status inputs: Status inputs (with the exception of the safety loop) of the contact
feedback network (CFN) are used for system supervision and require mains-related
input voltage
• Input safety loop Refer to Terminal loading outputs
• Input currents and input voltages
- UeMax UN +10 %
- UeMin UN -15 %
- IeMax 1.5 mA peak
- IeMin 0.7 mA peak
• Contact material recommendation Gold-plated silver contacts
for external signal sources (LP,
Pmin, Pmax, etc.)
• Transition / settling behavior / boun-
ce
- Perm. bounce time of contacts Max. 50 ms
when switching on / off (after the bounce time, contact must stay
closed or open)
• UN AC 120 V
• Voltage detection
- On AC 90...132 V
- Off <AC 40 V

29/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 4 Technical data 15.10.2010
 4.1.2 Terminal loading Outputs

Total contact loading:

• Rated voltage AC 120 V, 50 / 60 Hz
• Unit input current (safety loop) from: Max. 5 A
- Fan motor contactor
- Ignition transformer
- Valves
- Oil pump / magnetic clutch
(optional via AGM60...)

Individual contact loading:

Fan motor contactor
• Rated voltage AC 120 V, 50 / 60 Hz
• Rated current 1.6 A pilot duty output declaration to
UL372
• Power factor Cosϕ >0.4
Alarm output
• Rated voltage AC 120 V, 50 / 60 Hz
• Rated current 1A
• Power factor Cosϕ >0.4
Ignition transformer
• Rated voltage AC 120 V, 50 / 60 Hz
• Rated current 1.6 A pilot duty output declaration to
UL372
or
250 VA ignition output declaration to
UL372
• Power factor Cosϕ >0.2
Fuel valves
• Rated voltage AC 120 V, 50 / 60 Hz
• Rated current 1.6 A pilot duty output declaration to
UL372
• Power factor Cosϕ >0.4
Operation display
• Rated voltage AC 120 V, 50 / 60 Hz
• Rated current 0.5 A
• Power factor Cosϕ >0.4

4.1.3 Analog output / load output X74.3

Accuracy of output voltage ±1%

30/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 4 Technical data 15.10.2010
 4.1.4 Cable lengths

• Mains line AC 120 V Max. 100 m (100 pF/m)

• Display, BCI For installation under the burner hood or
in the control panel
Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
• Load controller (LR) X5-03 Max. 20 m (100 pF/m)
• Load controller analog X64 (24 mA) Max. 20 m (100 pF/m)
• Safety loop / burner flange (total) Max. 20 m (100 pF/m)
• External lockout reset button Max. 20 m (100 pF/m)
• Safety valve (SV) Max. 20 m (100 pF/m)
• VSD control ¹)²) Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
• Speed input Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
• Fuel valve (V1/V2/V3) Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
• Pilot valve (PV) Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
• Ignition transformer (Z) Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
• Other lines Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)

¹) Do not run the cable together with other cables. If not observed, hum voltage might
cause electromagnetic interference
²) Shorter cable length due to closed control loop

Specification as per EN 60730-1

Type of shutdown or interruption of each circuit
Shutdown with microswitch 1-pole
Mode of operation Type 2 B

4.1.5 Cross-sectional areas

The cross-sectional areas of the mains power lines (L, N, and PE) and, if required, the
safety loop (safety limit thermostat, water shortage, etc.) must be sized for rated cur-
rents according to the selected external primary fuse. The cross-sectional areas of the
other cables must be sized in accordance with the internal unit fuse (max. 6.3 AT).

Min. cross-sectional area 0.75 mm²

(single- or multi-core as per VDE 0100)

Cable insulation must meet the relevant temperature requirements and environmental
conditions.

Fuses used inside LMV36... basic unit

- F1 6.3 AT DIN EN 60127 2 / 5

31/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 4 Technical data 15.10.2010
 4.2 Signal cable AGV50... from AZL2... → BCI
Signal cable Color white
Unshielded
Conductor 4 x 0.141 mm²
With RJ11 connector
Cable length
- AGV50.100 1m
- AGV50.300 3m
Supplier Recommended:
Hütter
http://www.huetter.co.at/telefonkabel.htm
Order number: on request
Location Under the burner hood (extra measures
required for SKII EN 60730-1)

4.3 Environmental conditions

Storage DIN EN 60721-3-1
Climatic conditions Class 1K3
Mechanical conditions Class 1M2
Temperature range -20...+60 °C
Humidity <95 % r.h.
Transport DIN EN 60721-3-2
Climatic conditions Class 2K2
Mechanical conditions Class 2M2
Temperature range -30...+60 °C
Humidity <95 % r.h.
Operation DIN EN 60721-3-3
Climatic conditions Class 3K3
Mechanical conditions Class 3M3
Temperature range -20...+60 °C
Humidity <95 % r.h.

Caution!
Condensation, formation of ice and ingress of water are not permitted!

32/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 4 Technical data 15.10.2010
 4.4 Flame detectors
4.4.1 Ionization probe

For continuous operation!

No-load voltage at ION terminal Approx. UMains

(X10–05 terminal 2)

Caution!
Protect the ionization probe against electric shock hazard!

Short-circuit current Max. AC 1 mA

Required detector current Min. DC 4 µA, flame display approx. 30 %
Possible detector current Max. DC 16…40 µA, flame display
approx. 100 %
Max. perm. length of detector cable 3 m (wire–ground 100 pF/m)
(laid separately)

& Note
The higher the detector cable’s capacitance (cable length), the more voltage at the
ionization probe, and thus the detector current, drops. Long cable lengths plus very
highly resistive flames might necessitate low-capacitance detector cables (e.g. ignition
cable). In spite of technical measures taken in the circuitry aimed at compensating po-
tential adverse effects of the ignition spark on the ionization current, it must be made
certain that the minimum detector current required is already reached during the igni-
tion phase. If this is not the case, the connections on the primary side of the ignition
transformer must be changed and / or the electrodes relocated.

Threshold values when flame is supervised by an ionization probe:

- Start prevention (extraneous light) Intensity of flame (parameter 954) ≥18%
- Operation Intensity of flame (parameter 954) >24%

ION input
100

90

80
Flame intensity in %

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

Ionization current in uA

Figure 9: Ionization input at AC 120 V

33/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 4 Technical data 15.10.2010
 4.4.2 UV flame detectors QRA2… / QRA4.U / QRA10…

Caution!
If flame detectors QRA2… / QRA4.U / QRA10... are used for flame supervision
with the LMV36..., it must be ensured that the basic unit is permanently con-
nected to power (conforming to EN 230 / EN 298), thus enabling the system to
detect flame detector failures during startup and shutdown. Generally, the sys-
tem works with QRA... flame detectors in intermittent operation.
For technical data, refer to Data Sheet N7712 covering QRA2... / QRA10... UV
flame detector!
For technical data, refer to Data Sheet N7711 covering QRA4.U UV flame detec-
tor!

Threshold values when flame is supervised by QRA...:

- Start prevention (extraneous light) Intensity of flame (parameter 954) ≥18%
- Operation Intensity of flame (parameter 954) >24%

34/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 4 Technical data 15.10.2010
 4.4.3 Photoresistive flame detectors QRB…

No-load voltage at QRB... terminal Approx. DC 5 V

(X10–05 terminal 3)
Max. perm. length of QRB... detector 3 m (wire – wire 100 pF/m)
cable (laid separately)

& Note
A detector resistance of RF <500 Ω is identified as a short-circuit and leads to safety
shutdown in operation as if the flame had been lost.

For this reason, before considering the use of a highly sensitive photoresistive detector
(QRB1B... or QRB3S), it should be checked whether this type of flame detector is in-
deed required! Increased line capacitance between QRB... connection and mains live
wire L has an adverse effect on the sensitivity and increases the risk of damaged flame
detectors due to overvoltage. Always run detector cables separately!

Threshold values when flame is supervised by QRB...:

Start prevention (extraneous light) <400 kΩ
with RQRB Intensity of flame ≥10%
Operation with RQRB <230 kΩ
Intensity of flame >16%
Short-circuit detection with RQRB <0.5 kΩ

7540d04e/1010

0,1 1 10 100 1000

Figure 10: QRB… input at AC 120 V

35/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 4 Technical data 15.10.2010
 4.5 Switch unit AGM60...
Mains voltage AC 120 V -15% / +10%
Mains frequency 50/60 Hz ±6%
Power consumption <5 W (typically) (without actuator supply)
Safety class I with parts according to II and III to
DIN EN 60730-1
Galvanic separation between mains vol- No
tage terminals and actuator signal lines
and actuator supply lines
Degree of protection IP00
Note:
The burner or boiler manufacturer (OEM)
must ensure degree of protection IP40 to
DIN EN 60529 for burner controls by
adequate installation of the AGM60...

The AGM60... together with the LMV36...

is suited for installation under the burner
hood or inside a control cabinet or control
panel
Detection time fuel changeover <400 ms
Switching frequency fuel changeover Min. 3 s
Switching cycles fuel changeover Max. 5´000
Perm. mains primary fuse (externally) Max. 6.3 AT
Power must always be supplied via the
basic unit
(refer to chapter Inputs / Outputs)
Mains supply:
Input current depending on the operating state of the unit
Mains voltage is monitored by the burner control
Dimensions (W x H x D) 180.7 x 120.7 x 51.7 mm
Mounting Top hat rail to DIN EN 60715,
35 mm or screwed

36/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 4 Technical data 15.10.2010
 4.5.1 Terminal output Inputs

Status input: Fuel selection, pressure switch

• Input currents and input voltages
- UeMax UN +10%
- UeMin UN -15%
- IeMax 1.5 mA peak
- IeMin 0.7 mA peak
• Contact material recommendation Gold-plated silver contacts
for external switching contact,
transducer (Pmax, POC)
• Transition / settling behavior /
bounce
- Perm. bounce time of contacts Max. 50 ms
when switching on/off (after the bounce time, the contact must
stay closed or open)
• UN AC 120 V
• Voltage detection
- On AC 90...132 V
- Off <AC 40 V

4.5.2 Terminal output Outputs

Total contact output:

• Rated voltage AC 120 V, 50/60 Hz
Refer also Total contact output in chapter Terminal output Outputs

Individual contact loads:

Fuel valve
• Rated voltage AC 120 V, 50/60 Hz
• Rated current 1.6 pilot duty output declaration to UL732
• Power factor Cosϕ >0.4
Safety valve (SV)
(magnetic clutch / oil pump)
• Rated voltage AC 120 V, 50/60 Hz
• Rated current 1.6 A pilot duty output declaration to
UL732
• Power factor Cosϕ >0.4
Connections for pressure switch
• Rated voltage AC 120 V , 50/60 Hz
• Rated current 1.5 mA
• Power factor ---
Power supply for pressure switch-max
(Pmax) / POC
(X5-02.3 or X22-02.3)
• IaMax <10 mA
Fuel feedback to LMV36...
(X31-02.1 or X31-02.2)
• IaMax <10 mA

37/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 4 Technical data 15.10.2010
 4.5.3 Cable lengths

• Mains line Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)

LMV36... → AGM60...
• Fuel valves Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
• Other lines Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
• Fuel selector Max. 20 m (100 pF/m)
• Load controller LR Max. 20 m (100 pF/m)

Specification as per EN 60730-1

Type of shutdown or interruption of each circuit
Shutdown with microswitch Single-pole
Mode of operation Type 2 B

4.5.4 Cross-sectional areas

The cross-sectional areas of the power supply lines (L, N and PE) must be capable of
carrying the rated currents according to the built-in unit fuse of the respective basic unit
(max. 6.3 AT).

Min. cross-sectional area 0.75 mm²

(single- or multi-core to VDE 0100)

Cable insulations must satisfy the relevant temperature requirements and environmental
conditions.

4.5.5 Electrical connections of actuators

The ready connected actuator cables must not be extended.

4.5.6 Environmental conditions

Storage DIN EN 60721-3-1

Climatic conditions Class 1K3
Mechanical conditions Class 1M2
Temperature range -20...+60 °C
Humidity <95% r.h.
Transport DIN EN 60721-3-2
Climatic conditions Class 2K2
Mechanical conditions Class 2M2
Temperature range -30...+60 °C
Humidity <95% r.h.
Operation DIN EN 60721-3-3
Climatic conditions Class 3K3
Mechanical conditions Class 3M3
Temperature range -20...+60 °C
Humidity <95% r.h.

Caution!
Condensation, formation of ice and ingress of water are not permitted!

38/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 4 Technical data 15.10.2010
 5 Dimensions
5.1 LMV36...
Dimensions in mm
230
202
192
141
82,5
22,8
17,3
10,2
16,5

25,5
39,3

53,6
76,6
100,8
118,5

118,5
135
122

R100

12,5 23,5
27,2
82,5
128,5
172
202
217
19,5

19,7
60

Figure 11: Dimensions of the LMV36...

39/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 5 Dimensions 15.10.2010
 5.2 AGM60...
Dimensions in mm

170 5,4

105 37,9

5,4

43,4

120,7
110
34

180,7

51,7
Figure 12: Dimensions of the AGM60...

40/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 5 Dimensions 15.10.2010
 6 Basic unit
6.1 Description of inputs and outputs
This chapter covers the key features of the basic unit’s inputs and outputs. For exact
use of the inputs and the activation of outputs, refer to chapter Sequence diagrams.

Flame signal input and LMV...

5
flame detector X10–05
and X10–06 QRB... / QRC... GND
4

X10-05
3
QRB.../ QRC... signal voltage
2
Ionization probe (ION)
1
Protective earth (PE)
Bild 271e/1010

Figure 13: Flame signal input X10-05

LMV...
2

X10-06
QRA...
1

Bild 272/0409

Figure 14: Flame signal input X10-06

Connection choices:
• Ionization probe
• QRA2... / QRA10...
• QRA4.U
• QRB...

41/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.2 Flame detectors
• For display of the flame on the AZL2..., the following general conditions apply:
- Display is subject to various component tolerances, which means that
deviations of ± 10% can occur
- Note that, for physical reasons, there is no linear relationship between flame
display and detector signal values

The LMV36... system can be used with different types of flame detectors. For the correct
use of flame detectors, refer to chapter Sequence diagrams.
The flame detector used must be correctly parameterized.

Caution!
Continuous operation is possible only when using an ionization probe!

In the hardware of the LMV36..., the flame signals are subdivided into 2 groups (group 0
covering types the QRB... and group 1 covering ionization and the QRA…). The flame
detector for gas is selected via parameter 221 (fuel 0) / 321 (fuel 1), that for oil via pa-
rameter 261 (fuel 0) / 361 (fuel 1).

No. Parameter

Gas: Active detector flame evaluation

221 0 = QRB
1 = ION / QRA
Fuel 1 gas: Active detector of flame evaluation
321 0 = QRB
1 = ION / QRA…
Oil: Active detector of flame evaluation
261 0 = QRB
1 = ION / QRA
Fuel 1 oil: Active detector of flame evaluation
361 0 = QRB
1 = ION / QRA…

42/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.2.1 Loss of flame

In the event of loss of flame, the unit initiates safety shutdown, followed by a restart, if
required. A repetition counter can be used to select the number of flame losses after
which the unit shall initiate lockout (refer to chapter Repetition counter).

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
7 0 Loss of flame

No. Parameter
Software drop-out delay time of flame signal (100 ms)
186 Index 0 = QRB... (0 = inactive, >1)
Index 1 = ION / QRA... (0 = inactive, >3 -only 200 ms steps)
Fuel 1: Software drop-out delay time of flame signal (100 ms)
187 Index 0 = QRB... (0 = inactive, >1)
Index 1 = ION / QRA... (0 = inactive, >3 -only 200 ms steps)
Repetition limit value loss of flame
240 1 = No repetition
2 = 1 Repetition
Repetition limit value loss of flame
340 1 = No repetition
2 = 1 Repetition
280 Repetition limit value loss of flame
1 = No repetition
2 = 1 Repetition
380 Repetition limit value loss of flame
1 = No repetition
2 = 1 Repetition

Caution!
The response time of the flame detector leads to an extension of the second
safety time (TSA2). This must be taken into account when designing the burner!

6.2.2 Extraneous light

Extraneous light during standby (phase 12) leads to prevention of startup, followed by a
restart. Extraneous light during the prepurge phase results in immediate lockout. If ex-
traneous light occurs during the shutdown phase, the system switches to the safety
phase.

One repetition is permitted. This means that if the error occurs again the next time the
system is shut down, the unit will initiate lockout.

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
4 0 Extraneous light during startup
1 Extraneous light during shutdown
2 Extraneous light during startup – prevention of startup

6.2.3 No flame at the end of safety time (TSA)

If no flame is established by the end of the first safety time, the unit initiates lockout.

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
2 1 No flame at the end of safety time 1 (TSA1)
2 No flame at the end of safety time 2 (TSA2)

43/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.2.4 Flame intensity

The flame’s intensity can be displayed. It is standardized from 0 to 100%.

No. Parameter

954 Intensity of flame

& Note
Also refer to chapter Intensity of flame during curve settings.

6.2.5 Supervision of flame detector

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
93 3 Short-circuit of flame detector

At the QRB… flame detector’s input, the LMV36... checks the detector for short-circuits
in operation.

44/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.3 Digital inputs
6.3.1 Safety loop X3–04 (optional pressure switch-max (Pmax)), ter-
minals 1 and 2

Input for connection of the safety loop. When any of the series-connected contacts in-
cluded in the loop opens, power supply to the fuel valves, the fan and the ignition equip-
ment is instantly cut.

The safety loop includes the following components:

− External burner switch (ON / OFF)
− Safety limiter / safety pressure limiter (SL / SPL)
− External control thermostat and / or pressurestat, if required
− Water shortage switch

& Note
Pressure switch-max (Pmax) when using POC via X5-02.

LMV...

T6.3 IEC
5 L
4 Si
Line voltage (N)
3
Protective earth (PE)
2
Power signal for safety loop
Safety loop 1
(optional pressure switch-max (Pmax))

shortage

STB
Bild 273e/0409

Water
Figure 15: Safety loop (optional pressure switch-max (Pmax)) X3-04

For diagnostic purposes, the contacts of the components included in the safety loop and
the burner flange contact are combined for delivering the safety loop signal. If there is
no such signal, the system initiates safety shutdown in any event.

If, with Load controller ON, there is no signal from the safety loop (start prevention), er-
ror code 22 is translated to text display OFF S (S = safety loop) and the numerical value
appears in the error history.

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
22 0 Safety loop / burner flange Open
OFF S

For the input, a repetition counter can be parameterized. Here, it is possible to set the
number of errors permitted until lockout occurs (refer to chapter Repetition counter).

No. Parameter

Repetition limit safety loop

1 = No repetition
215
2...15 = number of repetitions
16 = constant repetition

45/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.3.2 (Burner flange) X3–03, terminals 1 and 2

End switch burner flange (component of safety loop).

LMV...
Flange
2
“L” for end switch burner flange

X3-03
1
End switch burner flange
(component of safety loop)
Bild 274e/1010

Figure 16: Burner flange X3-03

For error diagnostics and parameters, refer to chapter Safety loop.

6.3.3 Input for external controller (ON / OFF) X5–03, terminal 1

When the external control loop is closed, the internal input message Heat request is
generated.
A heat request exists when the external controller signal is pending and, depending on
the configuration, a load controller calls for heat (refer to chapter Connection of load
controllers).
When there are no more requests for heat, the burner shuts down. The fuel valves are
closed, either immediately when the timer has elapsed, or when the low-fire position is
reached, depending on the parameter settings (refer to chapter End of operating posi-
tion).

& Note
Burner startup takes place only when this contact is closed.

LMV...
“L” for control 4
Internal fuel selection 1 3
X5-03

2
External load controller (On / Off) 1
On / Off
Bild 368e/1010

Figure 17: Inputs for external load controller ON / OFF X5-03

46/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.3.4 Air pressure switch (APS) X3–02

Input for connection of an air pressure switch: Air pressure is anticipated when the fan is
switched on. If there is no air pressure signal, the system initiates lockout.
The air pressure switch must have an NO contact.

If no air pressure switch is required (e.g. when firing on oil), a wire link to the fan output
must be fitted (between X3-02, terminal 1, and X3-05, terminal 1).

Caution!
The OEM must check to see whether the burner can be operated without air
pressure switch. This may necessitate a special approval, depending on the
type of application.

LMV...

2
“L” for air pressure switch (LP)

X3-02
1
Air pressure switch (LP)
Bild 277e/1010

Figure 18: Air pressure switch (APS) X3-02

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
3 0 Air pressure off
1 Air pressure on
4 Air pressure on – prevention of startup

47/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.3.5 Pressure switch for gas valve proving (P LT) X9-04

Input for connection of Pressure switch valve proving (P LT) X9-04.

The input is active only when firing on gas and when the valve proving is activated (refer
to chapter Program sequence).

No. Parameter

Gas: Execution valve proving

0 = no valve proving
241 1 = valve proving on startup
2 = valve proving on shutdown
3 = valve proving on startup and shutdown
Fuel 1 gas: Execution valve proving
0 = no valve proving
341 1 = valve proving on startup
2 = valve proving on shutdown
3 = valve proving on startup and shutdown

LMV...

3 P LT
1

Pressure switch valve proving (PLT) 2

or oil pressure switch-min (Pmin)

Bild 370e/1010

Figure 19: LMV36…: Pressure switch valve proving gas (P LT) X9-04

AGM60...

1
LMV...
2

to basic unit
3 3
1

Pressure switch valve proving (PLT) 2 4

or oil pressure switch-min (Pmin)
1 5
1

1
2 Fuel 0

3
1

1
Fuel 1

Oilmin 2
3

Bild 372e/1010
Figure 20: LMV36… with AGM60…: Pressure switch valve proving gas (P LT) X9-04

Pressure switch valve proving (P LT)

Input for connection of valve proving with own pressure switch for valve proving.
The input is active only when valve proving is activated.

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
12 0 Fuel valve 1 (V1) leaking
1 Fuel valve 2 (V2) leaking

& Note
When using configuration Valve proving, it is not possible to use the input for Start re-
lease gas.

48/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.3.6 Gas pressure switch-min (Pmin), start release gas X5–01
Input for connection of a pressure switch-min for gas: If the plant does not require a
pressure switch-min, a wire link must be fitted between terminals 2 and 3.

Gas pressure switch-min

In all types of gas trains, minimum gas pressure is expected from phase 22. If no gas
pressure is detected when the maximum time (P214) has elapsed, the gas shortage
program is started (refer to chapter Gas shortage program).

LMV...

“L” for pressure switch

X5-01
Gas pressure switch-min (Pmin)
Protective earth (PE)
Bild 366e/1010

Figure 21: Gas pressure switch-min (Pmin) X5-01

Caution!
The OEM must check to see whether the burner can be operated without pres-
sure switch-min. This may necessitate a special approval, depending on the
type of application.

No. Parameter
214 Max. time start release
285 Oil: Gas pressure switch-min with «Lo Gp»
0 = inactive
1 = active

During the safety times (TSA1/TSA2), the signal received from pressure switch-min is
only assessed after a certain period of time in order to ignore the pressure shocks that
occur the moment the valves open. The time to elapse for signal assessment can be pa-
rameterized.

No. Parameter
229 Gas: Time to respond to pressure faults within safety time 1 (TSA1) and safety
time 2 (TSA2)
329 Fuel 1 gas: Time to respond to pressure faults within safety time 1 (TSA1) and
safety time 2 (TSA2)

If there is no gas pressure, at least safety shutdown is initiated.

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
20 0 Pressure switch-min (Pmin)
No minimum gas pressure

49/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 For the input, a repetition counter can be parameterized. It can be used to set the num-
ber of errors permitted until lockout occurs. The counter also impacts the gas shortage
program (refer to chapter Repetition counter).

No. Parameter
223 Repetition limit value gas pressure switch-min
1 = No repetition
2...15 = number of repetitions
16 = constant repetition
323 Repetition limit value gas pressure switch-min
1 = No repetition
2...15 = number of repetitions
16 = constant repetition

Start release gas

If, at the same time, the input is used as a start release input (e.g. for an air supply
damper), it can be connected in series with the pressure switch.
When selecting Valve proving via pressure switch-min (P236), function Start release gas
is not supported.

6.3.7 Oil pressure switch-min (Pmin) X9-04 (X5–01 on AGM60...)

Input for connection of a pressure switch-min for oil: If the plant does not require a pres-
sure switch-min, a wire link between terminal 2 and terminal 3 must be fitted.

Caution!
The OEM must check to see whether the burner can be operated without using
a pressure switch-min. This may necessitate a special approval, depending on
the application.

LMV...

3 P LT 3 Oilmin
1

Pressure switch valve proving (PLT) 2 2

or oil pressure switch-min (Pmin)

Bild 371e/1010

Figure 22: LMV36...: Oil pressure switch valve proving (P LT) X9-04

AGM60...

1
1

LMV...
2
to basic unit

3 3
1

Pressure switch valve proving (PLT) 2 4

or oil pressure switch-min (Pmin)
1 5
1

1
Fuel 0

2
3
1

1
Fuel 1

Oilmin 2
3

Bild 369e/1010

Figure 23: LMV36... with AGM60...: Oil pressure switch valve proving (P LT) X9-04

50/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 Oil pressure switch-min

In all types of oil train, the minimum oil pressure is expected from phase 38. If no oil
pressure is detected when the maximum time (P217) has elapsed or if, subsequently,
the oil pressure drops, the system initiates lockout.

No. Parameter

Max. Waiting time for detection of detector or pressure signal (e.g. homerun,
217
preignition «Lo»)

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
20 0 Pressure switch-min (Pmin)
No min. oil pressure

During the safety times (TSA1/TSA2), the signal from pressure switch-min is only as-
sessed after a certain period of time in order to ignore the pressure shocks that occur
the moment the valves open. The time to elapse for signal assessment can be param-
eterized.

No. Parameter

269 Oil: Time to respond to pressure faults within safety time 1 (TSA1) and safety
time 2 (TSA2)
369 Fuel 1 oil: Time to respond to pressure faults within safety time 1 (TSA1) and
safety time 2 (TSA2)

6.3.8 Setting the time for checking the pressure switch

For oil pressure switch-min, the point in time from which the check is made can be
set via parameter 276 (active from phase 38, or from safety time (TSA)).

No. Parameter

276 Oil: Pressure switch-min input

0 = inactive
1 = active from phase 38
2 = active from safety time (TSA)
376 Fuel 1 Oil: Pressure switch-min input
0 = inactive
1 = active from phase 38
2 = active from safety time (TSA)

51/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.3.9 Gas / oil pressure switch-max (Pmax) / or POC contact, start
release oil X5–02
Input for connection of a pressure switch-max for gas or oil: The sensor must have an
NC contact, which means that the contact opens when the adjusted maximum pressure
is exceeded. If the plant does not require a pressure switch-max, a wire link must be fit-
ted between terminals 2 and 3.

Caution!
The OEM must check to see whether the burner can be operated without pres-
sure switch-max. This may necessitate a special approval, depending on the
type of application.

LMV...

“L” for pressure switch

X5-02
Pressure switch-max or POC
Protective earth (PE) Pmax/POC

Bild 279e/1010

Figure 24: LMV36...: Gas / oil Pressure switch-max (Pmax) or POC X5-02

AGM60...

P 1
Oilmax 2
3

P 1
LMV... Gasmax 2

“L” for pressure switch 3 3

2 1
X5-02

Pressure switch-max or POC

Protective earth (PE) 1 2
3
Bild 280e/1010

V3
4
5

Figure 25: LMV36... with AGM60…: Gas / oil pressure switch-max (Pmax) or POC X5-02

The connection facility can also be used as POC (proof of closure) (refer to chapter Se-
quence diagrams).

No. Parameter

Gas: Pressure switch-max / POC input

0 = inactive
237 1 = pressure switch-max
2 = POC
3 = pressure switch valve proving
Fuel 1 gas: Pressure switch-max / POC input
0 = inactive
337 1 = pressure switch-max
2 = POC
3 = pressure switch valve proving

& Note
If the input is used for POC or for pressure switch valve proving can be included in the
safety loop. In that case, pressure switch-max must not be fitted between the valves,
but downstream from them.

52/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 Gas pressure switch-max

In all types of gas trains, the maximum gas pressure is monitored from phase 40. If the
maximum gas pressure is exceeded, the system initiates lockout.

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
14 0 POC open
1 POC closed
21 0 Pressure switch-max (Pmax): Max. gas pressure exceeded

During the safety times (TSA1 / TSA2), the signal from pressure switch-max is only as-
sessed after a certain period time has elapsed in order to ignore the pressure shocks
that occur the moment the valves open.

No. Parameter
229 Gas: Time to respond to pressure faults within safety time 1 (TSA1) and safety
time 2 (TSA2)
329 Fuel 1 gas: Time to respond to pressure faults within safety time 1 (TSA1) and
safety time 2 (TSA2)

53/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 Pressure switch-max-oil

In all types of oil trains, the maximum oil pressure is monitored from phase 22. If the
maximum oil pressure is exceeded after the maximum time (parameter 214) has
elapsed, or during the subsequent phases, the system initiates lockout.

No. Parameter
214 Max. time start release

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
14 0 POC open
1 POC closed
21 0 Pressure switch-max (Pmax): Max. oil pressure exceeded

During the safety times (TSA1 / TSA2), the signal from pressure switch-max is only as-
sessed after a certain period of time has elapsed to ignore the pressure shocks that oc-
cur the moment the valves open.

No. Parameter
269 Oil: Time to respond to pressure faults within safety time 1 (TSA1) and safety
time 2 (TSA2)
369 Fuel 1 oil: Time to respond to pressure faults within safety time 1 (TSA1) and
safety time 2 (TSA2)

The terminal can also be used for POC (Proof of Closure) (refer to chapter Sequence
diagrams).

No. Parameter

Oil: Pressure switch-max / POC input

0 = inactive
277
1 = pressure switch-max
2 = POC
Fuel 1 oil: Pressure switch-max / POC input
0 = inactive
377
1 = pressure switch-max
2 = POC

& Note
If the input is used for POC, pressure switch-max can be included in the safety loop.
In that case, pressure switch-max must not be fitted between the valves, but after
them.

Start release oil

If the input is simultaneously used as a start release input (e.g. for an air supply
damper), the latter can be connected in series with the pressure switch.
If the input is parameterized for POC, it cannot be used as a start release input.

54/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.3.10 Fuel selection

The fuel selection is made by an external connected switch at AGM60...

The selection made is transmitted to the LMV36... basic unit via 2 signal lines (internal
fuel selection 0 + 1).

Fuel 0 = 1, Fuel 1 = 0 Æ Fuel 0 is selected

Fuel 0 = 0, Fuel 1 = 1 Æ Fuel 1 is selected
Fuel 0 = 0, Fuel 1 = 0 Æ Line interrupted Æ Safety shutdown / lockout
Fuel 0 = 1, Fuel 1 = 1 Æ Reset

Next time the burner is started up after shutdown or safety shutdown, the new fuel is
used.

After fuel changeover, any manually selected output or output called for by the BAC sys-
tem is cancelled and automatic operation is activated, thus enabling an automatic restart
with the new fuel if there is a request for heat.

Exception:
The manual off function for manual output and burner off (output = 0) via the BAC sys-
tem are maintained.

LMV...
AGM60...
4
Internal fuel selection 0 1

X31-02
3
X5-03

0
Internal fuel selection 1 2 2

1
P
1

Bild 373e/0409

Figure 26: LMV36... with AGM60…: Fuel selection

6.3.11 Reset X8-04, terminal 1

Input for connection of a reset button. The basic unit can be reset or manually locked via
this input (refer to chapter Reset / manual locking).

LMV...
X8-04

Reset (manual lockout) L

Bild 374e/0409

Figure 27: Reset X8-04

55/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.4 Digital outputs
Safety-related outputs, type SI

Using a contact feedback network (CFN), these contacts are read back by the micro-
computers and checked for their correct positions.

Non-safety-related outputs, type No-SI

These outputs are not monitored by the CFN and, for this reason, can only be used for
non-safety-related actuators, or actuators made safe in some other form (e.g. alarm).

6.4.1 Output alarm type No-SI X3–05, terminal 2

LMV...

X3-05
Alarm

Bild 282/0309

Figure 28: Output alarm X3-05

Output for connection of an alarm lamp or horn.

The output is activated when the unit is in the lockout position (phase 00).
This output can also be used to indicate start prevention.

6.4.2 Fan motor contactor type SI X3–05, terminal 1

LMV...
X3-05

Fan motor contactor

Bild 283e/1109

Figure 29: Fan motor contactor X3-05

Output for control of a fan power contactor (200 VA). In accordance with the sequence
diagrams, the fan is on in phase 22 (refer to chapter Sequence diagrams).

6.4.3 Fan continuous purging X3–05, terminal 3

LMV...

Continuous fan operation

X3-05

Bild 284e/1010

Figure 30: Continuous fan operation X3-05

If continuous purging is required, the fan motor contactor must be connected to Con-
tinuous fan operation – X3-05, terminal 3. This terminal is tapped behind the unit fuse
and the safety loop (refer to chapter Continuous fan).

56/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.4.4 Output ignition (Z) type SI (IGNITION) X4–02
LMV...

Ignition (Z)

X4-02
Protective earth (PE)
Bild 285e/0409

Figure 31: Output ignition (Z) X4-02

Output for the connection of ignition transformers or electronic ignition modules.

Gas

When firing on gas, ignition is switched on in phase 38 just before reaching safety time 1
(TSA1).

The preignition time in phase 38 can be parameterized.

No. Parameter
226 Gas: Preignition time
326 Fuel 1 gas: Preignition time

Oil

When firing on oil, there is a choice of short and long preignition (same as with gas).

No. Parameter

Oil: Point in time oil is ignited

281 0 = short preignition (Ph38)
1 = long preignition (with fan) (Ph22)
Fuel 1 oil: Point in time oil is ignited
381 0 = short preignition (Ph38)
1 = long preignition (with fan) (Ph22)

When using long preignition, ignition is switched on in phase 22, together with the fan.

In the case of short preignition, the preignition time can be parameterized.

No. Parameter

266 Oil: Preignition time

366 Fuel 1 oil: Preignition time

57/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.4.5 Outputs fuel valves type SI (V1...V3 / PV) X8–02, X7-01, X7-
02
LMV...

Protective earth (PE)

X8-02
Auxiliary terminal V1 for series
connection of two AC 115 V valves
Fuel valve 1 (V1)
Bild 286e/0409

Figure 32: LMV36...: Output fuel valve (V1) X8-02

AGM60...

V1
V1 2

X8-02
3

N
4

PE
1

PE
2

X24-04

N
V1 3

V2
4

V1
LMV...

Protective earth (PE) 4

3
X8-02

Auxiliary terminal V1 for series

connection of two AC 115 V valves 2 1

Fuel valve 1(V1) 1 2

Bild 287e/0409 3

V3
4
5

Figure 33: LMV36... with AGM60…: Output fuel valve (V1) X8-02

58/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 LMV...
Fuel valve 2 (V2)

X7-01
Protective earth (PE)

Bild 288e/0409

Figure 34: LMV36...: Output fuel valve (V2) X7-01

AGM60...

V2
V2 2

X8-03
3

N
4

PE
1

PE
2

N
X24-04
V2
3

V2
4

V1
1
LMV...
2
Fuel valve 2 (V2) 3 3
X7-01

V3
2
Protective earth (PE) 1 5

Bild 289e/0409

Figure 35: LMV36... with AGM60…: Output fuel valve (V2) X7-01

LMV...
Brennstoffventil 3 (V3) /
Pilotventil (PV)
X7-02

Schutzleiter (PE)
Bild 290/0409

Figure 36: LMV36...: Output fuel valve (V3) / pilot valve PV X7-02

Outputs for connection of the gas or oil valves, depending on the selected type of fuel
train (refer to chapter Sequence diagrams).

59/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.4.6 Output safety valve (SV) type SI X6–03 / magnetic clutch
LMV...
Safety valve / magnetic clutch
Magnetic

X6-03
clutch
Protective earth (PE)
Bild 292e/1209

Figure 37: LMV36...: Output safety valve (SV) / magnetic clutch X6-03

AGM60...
1

X6-02
2
3
1

X24-06
2
3

2
3
LMV...

V3
4
Safety valve / magnetic clutch 3 5

X6-03
2
Protective earth (PE) 1

Bild 293e/1209

Figure 38: LMV36... with AGM60…: Output safety valve (SV) / magnetic clutch X6-03

Output for connection of an oil shutoff valve / oil connection valve or safety valve for liq-
uefied gas. The output is connected parallel to the output for the fan.

6.4.7 Output for indication of operation X8-04 terminal 2

LMV...
Indication of operation
X8-04

Bild 294e/0409

Figure 39: Output for indication of operation X8-04

Output for connection of indication of operation.

Caution!
The output is connected parallel to the fuel valve (V1).

60/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.5 Program sequence
The program sequence is shown in the form of sequence diagrams (refer to chapter
Fuel trains application examples). Using a number of parameters, the program se-
quence can be adapted to the respective application.

6.5.1 Time parameters

Using a number of time parameters, the time characteristics of the different types of fuel
trains can be matched to the requirements of the respective application.

In single-fuel operation or in dual-fuel operation, the parameters 225...299 are as-

signed to fuel 0.

No. Parameter

211 Fan rump-up time

212 Max. time down to low-fire
213 Waiting time home run
214 Max. time start release
Max. Waiting time for detection of detector or pressure signal (e.g. homerun,
217
preignition «Lo»)
225 Gas: Prepurge time
226 Gas: Preignition time
227 Gas: Safety time 1 (TSA1)
Gas: Time to respond to pressure faults within safety time 1 (TSA1) and safety
229
time 2 (TSA2)
230 Gas: Interval 1
231 Gas: Safety time 2 (TSA2)
232 Gas: Interval 2
233 Gas: Afterburn time
234 Gas: Postpurge time (no extraneous light test)
242 Gas: Valve proving evacuation time
243 Gas: Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure
244 Gas: Valve proving filling time
245 Gas: Valve proving time test gas pressure
246 Gas: Waiting time gas shortage
248 Gas: Postpurge time (t3) (abortion if load controller On)
265 Oil: Prepurge time
266 Oil: Preignition time
267 Oil: Safety time 1 (TSA1)
Oil: Time to respond to pressure faults within safety time 1 (TSA1) and safety
269
time 2 (TSA2)
270 Oil: Interval 1
271 Oil: Safety time 2 (TSA2)
272 Oil: Interval 2
273 Oil: Afterburn time
274 Oil: Postpurge time (no extraneous light test)
284 Oil: Postpurge time (t3) (abortion if load controller On)

61/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 In dual-fuel operation, the parameters 325...399 are assigned to fuel 1.

No. Parameter

325 Fuel 1 gas: Prepurge time

326 Fuel 1 gas: Preignition time
327 Fuel 1 gas: Safety time 1 (TSA1)
329 Fuel 1 gas: Time to respond to pressure faults within safety time 1 (TSA1) and
safety time 2 (TSA2)
330 Fuel 1 gas: Interval 1
331 Fuel 1 gas: Safety time 2 (TSA2)
332 Fuel 1 gas: Interval 2
333 Fuel 1 gas: Afterburn time
334 Fuel 1 gas: Postpurge time (no extraneous light test)
342 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving evacuation time
343 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure
344 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving filling time
345 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving time test gas pressure
346 Fuel 1 gas: Waiting time gas shortage
348 Fuel 1 gas: Postpurge time 3 (abortion if load controller On)
365 Fuel 1 oil: Prepurge time
366 Fuel 1 oil: Preignition time
367 Fuel 1 oil: Safety time 1 (TSA1)
369 Fuel 1 oil: Time to respond to pressure faults within safety time 1 (TSA1) and
safety time 2 (TSA2)
370 Fuel 1 oil: Interval 1
371 Fuel 1 oil: Safety time 2 (TSA2)
372 Fuel 1 oil: Interval 2
373 Fuel 1 oil: Afterburn time
374 Fuel 1 oil: Postpurge time (no extraneous light test)
384 Fuel 1 oil: Postpurge time 3 (abortion if load controller On)

Caution!
The OEM or the heating engineer must make certain that the times conform to
the standards covering the respective type of plant.

62/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.5.2 Valve proving
Valve proving is active only when firing on gas. Valve proving designed to detect leaking
gas valves and, if necessary, to prevent the valves from opening or ignition from being
switched on. Lockout is initiated, if required.

When making the valve proving test, the gas valve on the burner side is opened first to
bring the test space to atmospheric pressure. When the valve is closed, the pressure in
the test space is not allowed to exceed a certain level. Then, the test space is pressur-
ized by opening the gas valve on the mains side. After closing, the gas pressure must
not fall below a certain level. Type of valve proving can be selected via parameter 236 /
336.

Valve proving can be parameterized to take place on startup, shutdown, or both.

Recommendation: Perform valve proving on shutdown.

No. Parameter
Gas: Pressure switch-min input
0 = inactive
236 1 = pressure switch-min (upstream of fuel valve 1 (V1))
2 = valve proving via pressure switch-min (between fuel valve 1 (V1) and fuel
valve 2 (V2))
Gas: Pressure switch-max / POC input
0 = inactive
237 1 = pressure switch-max
2 = POC
3 = pressure switch valve proving
Gas: Execution valve proving
0 = no valve proving
241 1 = valve proving on startup
2 = valve proving on shutdown
3 = valve proving on startup and shutdown
242 Gas: Valve proving evacuation time
243 Gas: Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure
244 Gas: Valve proving filling time
245 Gas: Valve proving time test gas pressure
Fuel 1 gas: Pressure switch-min input
0 = inactive
336 1 = pressure switch-min (upstream of fuel valve 1 (V1))
2 = valve proving via pressure switch-min (between fuel valve 1 (V1) and fuel
valve 2 (V2))
Gas: Pressure switch-max / POC input
0 = inactive
337 1 = pressure switch-max
2 = POC
3 = pressure switch valve proving
Fuel 1 gas: Execution valve proving
0 = no valve proving
341 1 = valve proving on startup
2 = valve proving on shutdown
3 = valve proving on startup and shutdown
342 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving evacuation time
343 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure
344 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving filling time
345 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving time test gas pressure

Caution!
If valve proving is parameterized to take place on startup and shutdown, the gas
valves must run through additional switching cycles. As a result, strain on the
gas valves (wear) increases.

63/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 Caution!
The OEM must set the evacuation, filling and test times for atmospheric or
mains pressure on every plant in compliance with the requirements of EN 1643.

It must be ensured that the 2 test times are correctly set. It is to be checked whether the
gas required for the test may be fed into the combustion chamber (on the relevant appli-
cation). The test times are safety-related. After a reset and in the case of aborted or
prevented valve proving, the unit performs valve proving on the next startup (only when
valve proving is activated). Prepurging with valve proving is active during the startup
phase, even if it was deactivated.

Examples of aborted valve proving:

If the safety loop or the start prevention input for gas (containing Pmin) opens during
valve proving.

Valve proving – calculation of leakage rate

(PG - Pw) • V • 3600

tTest = ⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯
Patm • QLeck

QLeck in l/h Leakage rate in liters per hour

PG in mbar Overpressure between the valves at the beginning of the test phase
PW in mbar Overpressure set on the pressure switch (normally 50%
of the gas inlet pressure)
Patm in mbar Absolute air pressure (1013 mbar normal pressure)
V in l Volume between the valves (test volume) including valve volume
and pilot pipe, if present (Gp1 mod)
tTest in s Test time

6.5.3 Valve proving with separate pressure switch (P LT) X9-04

P
min
P
LT
Step 1: t80 – evacuation of test space.
Gas valve on the burner side is opened to bring the test space to
atmospheric pressure.

Step 2: t81 – atmospheric pressure test.

When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must
not exceed a certain level.

Step 3: t82 – filling of test space.

P LT Gas valve on the mains side opens to fill the test space.
Bild 410e/1010

Step 4: t83 – gas pressure test.

Figure 1: Valve proving with separate When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must
pressure switch (P LT) not drop below a certain level.

Legend
t80 Evacuation of test space (P242)
t81 Atmospheric pressure test (P243)
t82 Filling of test space (P244)
t83 Gas pressure test (P245)
V… Fuel valve
P LT Pressure switch – valve proving
Pmin Pressure switch-min
Input/output signal 1 (ON)
Input/output signal 0 (OFF)
Input permissible signal 1 (ON) or 0 (OFF)

64/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.5.4 Valve proving via gas pressure switch-min X5-01
P LT
(Pmin)
Step 1: t80 – evacuation of test space.
Gas valve on the burner side is opened to bring the test space to
atmospheric pressure.

Step 2: t81 – atmospheric pressure test.

When the gas has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must
not exceed a certain level.

Step 3: t82 – filling of test space.

P LT Gas valve on the mains side opens to fill the test space.
(Pmin)
Bild 411e/1010
Step 4: t83 – gas pressure test.
When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space
Figure 2: Valve proving via gas pressure switch- must not drop below a certain level.
min
Legend
t80 Evacuation of test space (P242)
t81 Atmospheric pressure test (P243)
t82 Filling of test space (P244)
t83 Gas pressure test (P245)
V… Fuel valve
Pmin Pressure switch-min
P LT Pressure switch – valve proving
Input/output signal 1 (ON)
Input/output signal 0 (OFF)
Input permissible signal 1 (ON) or 0 (OFF)

Performing valve proving via gas pressure switch-min affects the program se-
quence as follows (see Addendum Sequence diagram «G»):
a) Valve proving on startup:
Gas pressure switch-min (gas shortage test) is not sampled in phase 22, but
during valve proving at the end of the filling time.
b) Valve proving on shutdown / deactivated:
Gas pressure switch-min is sampled after preignition. For that purpose, a new
phase 39 (Pmin test) is introduced and, at the end of the phase (duration of
phase = filling time). In practice, this represents an extension of preignition by the
filling time, if valve proving via gas pressure switch-min was selected.

Valve proving test can only be made via the gas pressure switch-min.
The pressure switch must be fitted between the valves.
This has an impact on the program sequence (refer to chapter Sequence diagrams).
Valve proving continues to be activated via parameters 241 and 341.

6.5.4.1. Lockout phase (phase 00)

The relays of the fuel valves and the safety relay (fan) are deenergized, the alarm relay
is energized and lockout takes place. This means that phase 00 can only be quit via a
manual reset. The time of phase 00 is unlimited.

65/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.5.4.2. Safety phase (phase 02)

The safety phase is an intermediate phase which is completed prior to triggering lock-
out. The relays of the fuel valves and the safety relay (fan) are deenergized, but lockout
does not yet take place. The alarm relay is not yet activated. If possible or permitted,
safety checks or repetition counter checks are made whose results decide on the transi-
tion to Lockout phase or Standby. The duration of the safety phase is dynamic (depend-
ing on the extent of testing), the maximum time being 30 seconds.
This process is aimed primarily at avoiding unwanted lockouts, e.g. resulting from EMC
problems.

66/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.5.5 Special functions during the program sequence

6.5.5.1. Reset / manual lockout

The system can be manually locked by simultaneously pressing the Info button and any
other button on the AZL2... This function enables the user to interlock the system from
any operating level, that is, to trigger unalterable shutdown. Due to the system’s
makeup, this facility does not constitute an Emergency OFF function.

When making a reset, the following actions are carried out:

• Alarm relay and fault display are switched off
• The lockout position is cancelled
• The unit makes a reset and then changes to standby

The system can be reset in 3 different ways:

1. Reset on the AZL2... display and operating unit

If the unit is in the lockout position, a reset can be made by pressing the Info button for
1…3 seconds. The function is available only when the unit is in the lockout position.
Longer or shorter pushes on the button do not produce a reset so that the system main-
tains the lockout position.

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
167 2 Manual lockout by the AZL2...

67/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 2. Resetting by pressing the button by the Reset connection terminal on the
LMV36... basic unit (X8-04, terminal 1)

If the unit is in the lockout position, a reset can be made by pressing the button for 1…3
seconds. Longer or shorter pushes on the button are ignored so that the system main-
tains the lockout position.
If the unit is not in the lockout position and the reset button is pressed for 1…6 seconds,
a change to the lockout position takes place.
If this response is not desirable, it is possible to tap the supply for the reset button from the
alarm output, thus achieving the same response as described above under 1.

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
167 1 Manual lockout by contact

Without manual lockout With manual lockout

LMV... LMV...

X8-04
X3-05
Alarm Reset
Bild 375/0409

2
X8-04

Reset
Bild 376/0409

3. Resetting via the PC tool

Refer to the documentation covering the PC tool (J7352).

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
167 3 Manual lockout by PC tool

68/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.5.5.2. Alarm upon prevention of startup
If start prevention occurs, it is shown on the display of the AZL2...
Start prevention takes place only when a heat request is delivered and when one of the
startup criteria is not fulfilled.
The time to elapse from prevention of startup to display on the AZL2... is set to a fixed
value of 5 seconds.

In addition, it is possible to indicate preventions of startup via the alarm output. This
function can be activated per parameter.

No. Parameter
Alarm in the event of start prevention
210 0 = inactive
1 = active

If Alarm in the event of start prevention is activated via the alarm relay, prevention of
startup and lockout can only be distinguished via the display on the AZL2... Preventions
of startup are displayed as Err:, lockouts as Loc:.

& Note
If, in the event of prevention of startup, reset contact on the LMV36... basic unit (X8-
04.1 / terminal 1) is pressed, the unit locks out manually.
The time from occurrence of prevention of startup to indication by the alarm contact
equals the time to the display on the AZL2...

6.5.5.3. Possible preventions of startup

On the normal display, error code 201 is translated to text display OFF UPr0 or OFF
UPr1 (UPr = unprogrammiert = not programmed); the numerical value appears in the er-
ror history.

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
201 OFF 1 No operating mode selected
UPr0 or
OFF UPr1
2…3 No fuel train defined
4…7 No curve defined
8…15 Standardized speed undefined
16…31 Backup / restore was not possible
Other preventions of startup:
3 4 Air pressure on – prevention of startup
4 2 Extraneous light during startup – prevention of startup
14 64 POC open- prevention of startup
22 1 Safety loop / burner flange open- prevention of startup
OFF S
83 # Speed error VSD
97 # Error relay supervision
0 Safety relay contacts have welded or external power supply
fed to safety relay

No. Parameter
Standardized speed
642 Index 0 = speed 1
Index 1 = speed 2 (internal monitoring)
935 Absolute speed
936 Standardized speed

69/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.5.5.4. Repetition counter

Repetition counters are available for different types of errors. They are used to set the
number of errors permitted until lockout occurs. The last error initiates lockout. When
setting the number of errors to 3, for example, a repetition (restart) takes place after the
first 2 errors, and after the third error, the system initiates lockout.

& Note
Setting 16 means an infinite number of repetitions = no lockout.

Functions with adjustable repetition counter

No. Parameter

Repetition limit safety loop

1 = no repetition
215
2...15 = number of repetitions
16 = constant repetition
Repetition limit value gas pressure switch-min
1 = no repetition
2...15 = number of repetitions
223
16 = constant repetition
323
Recharging time:
After the Operation phase
Repetition limit value loss of flame
1 = No repetition
2 = 1 repetition
240
340 Recharging time:
280 After the Operation phase
380
Parameter assignment:
240 / 340 Gas / fuel 0
280 / 380 Oil / fuel 0

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
7 0 Loss of flame
20 0 Pressure switch-min (Pmin)
No minimum gas / oil pressure
22 0 Safety loop / burner flange open
OFF S

If the adjustable repetition counter limits are changed, the actual counter is recharged
only when the associated recharging time is reached: After power-on or after a reset.

& Note
If immediate recharging shall be enforced, the basic unit can be manually locked and
then reset.

70/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 Functions with fixed repetition counters
These counters cannot be set.

Settings
Meaning
Unit Basic setting
Number of repetitions in the event of error:
- Speed standardization VSD
- Speed error
- Referencing error actuator --- 3
- Positioning error actuator
Recharging time:
- End of Shutdown phase
Number of repetitions in the event of error:
- Relay
- Relay control --- 2
Recharging time:
- End of Operation phase
Number of repetition in the event of internal error
--- 5
Recharging time:
- After 24 hours of operation

Error Diagnostic Meaning

code code
82 # Error during VSD’s speed standardization
83 # Speed error VSD
85 # Referencing error ones actuators
86 # Error fuel actuator
87 # Error air actuator
95...98 # Error relay supervision
99…100 # Internal error relay control

71/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.5.5.5. Start without prepurging (as per EN 676)

When using valve proving and 2 fuel valves of class A, prepurging is not required (con-
forming to EN 676).
Prepurging can be deactivated via parameter.

No. Parameter

Gas: Prepurging
222 0 = inactive
1 = active
Fuel 1 gas: Prepurging
322 0 = inactive
1 = active

When prepurging is activated, it is performed in accordance with the adjusted prepurge

time.
If not activated, it is nevertheless performed of the following conditions apply:
• Alterable lockout position
• After an off time of >24 hours
• In the event of a power failure (power-on)
• In the event of shutdown due to an interruption of gas supply (safety shutdown)

No. Parameter

225 Gas: Prepurge time

325 Fuel 1 gas: Prepurge time

72/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.5.5.6. Gas shortage program

Valve proving via gas pressure switch-min (P236 = 2)

Since gas pressure switch-min is not located between the fuel valves, the gas shortage
test cannot be made in phase 22. Therefore, when performing valve proving on startup,
the gas shortage test is made at the end of the filling time (end of phase 82). With no
valve proving on startup, the gas shortage test is made directly before safety time 1 is
started (end of phase 39).

Standard valve proving (P236 = 1)

If the gas pressure is too low, startup is aborted in phase 22.

No. Parameter

246 Gas: Waiting time gas shortage

346 Fuel 1 gas: Waiting time gas shortage

If gas shortage occurs with the last of the parameterized number of start attempts, the
system initiates lockout.

No. Parameter

223 Repetition limit value gas pressure switch-min

1 = no repetition
2...15 = number of repetitions
16 = constant repetition
323 Repetition limit value gas pressure switch-min
1 = no repetition
2...15 = number of repetitions
16 = constant repetition

In that case, the system makes with gas shortage program a selectable number of start
attempts until lockout occurs. The waiting time from one start attempt to the next is dou-
bled each time, starting from an adjustable waiting time.

73/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.5.5.7. Program stop function

To simplify the burner settings in connection with commissioning and service work, the
program sequence of the LMV36... can be stopped at the following positions:
1) Air damper in prepurge position 24
2) Ignition position 36
3) Interval 1 44
4) Interval 2 52

The program stops are integrated in the setting sequence when the plant is commis-
sioned (refer to chapter Air-fuel ratio curves – settings and commissioning).
After the initial settings, program stops can be activated on the parameter level.

No. Parameter

Program stop
0 = inactive
1 = PrePurgP (Ph24)
208
2 = IgnitPos (Ph36)
3 = interval 1 (Ph44)
4 = interval 2 (Ph52)

The program stop function is maintained until manually deactivated. If the system halts
at one of the program stops, a message appears on the display of the AZL2....

Example: C:204 alternating with d:24 corresponding to program stop in prepurge posi-
tion.
Figure 40: Message in the case of program stop

6.5.5.8. Forced intermittent operation (<24 hours)

When forced intermittent operation is activated, the unit shuts down for a moment
after 23 hours and 45 minutes of uninterrupted operation.

Forced intermittent operation is a standard feature.

No. Parameter
239 Gas: Forced intermittent operation
0 = inactive
1 = active
279 Oil: Forced intermittent operation
0 = inactive
1 = active
339 Fuel 1 gas. Forced intermittent operation
0 = inactive
1 = active
379 Fuel 1 oil: Forced intermittent operation
0 = inactive
1 = active

6.5.5.9. Low-fire shutdown

To prevent the boiler from being shut down under full or nearly full load conditions, elec-
tronic air-fuel ratio control can run the burner to the low-fire position first when there is
no more request for heat (refer to chapter End of operating position).

74/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.5.5.10. Continuous fan

With burners that can be damaged by heat (e.g. several burners using the same com-
bustion chamber), continuous purging may be required. In that case, the fan operates
continuously in all phases.
For that purpose, the fan motor contactor is to be connected to X3-05, terminal 3,
tapped after the unit fuse and the safety loop.
For checking the air pressure switch, a pressure switch relief valve must be connected
to fan output X3-05, terminal 1. When output X3-05, terminal 1, is activated, the relief
valve diverts the fan pressure to the air pressure switch and, when deactivated, ensures
that no pressure is fed to the switch.

Example:

LMV...

X3-05
X3-02
Bild 296e/1010

Figure 41: Continuous fan

75/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.5.5.11. Test function for burner approval – loss-of-flame test
(TÜV test)

The purpose of this test is to verify the detection time required in the event of loss of
flame when applying for burner approval. When starting the test, the fuel valves are shut
to determine the time (resolution of 0.2 seconds) until the basic unit detects loss of
flame.

Procedure:

• Determine the burner output at which the test shall be made, using parameter 133
(fuel 0) or parameter 134 (fuel 1). If these parameters are not set, the test is carried
out at the current output of the system
• Start the test by entering the value of 1 for parameter 124.
If the burner’s output for the test is set (parameter 133 or 134), the system is
driven to that output level first. To ensure this functionality, the presetting of pa-
rameter 121 (manual output) is used. This cancels any manual output that was
previously active
• Now, the LMV36… shuts the fuel valves, leading to loss of flame
• The evaluation is made by the basic unit by measuring the time the system requires
from fuel valve shutdown until loss of flame is detected.
Then, the measured value is available as a diagnostic code in connection with
error C:7 (loss of flame)

The resolution is 0.2 seconds.

Example:
The display of C:7 D:10 means that the time required from valve shutdown to
detection of loss of flame is 2 seconds (D:10 corresponding 10 x 0.2 seconds).

When the test is successfully completed, parameter 124 is reset to 0. If unsuccess-

ful, a negative value is delivered for diagnostic purposes and error code 150 is en-
tered.

-1 = invalid phase (test possible in phase 60 only) – message displayed: C:150 D: 1

-2 = default output < minimum output – message displayed: C:150 D:2
-3 = default output > maximum output – message displayed: C:150 D:3
-4 = manual abortion (no error, start variable was manually reset to 0) – message
displayed: C:150 D:4
-5 = timeout with TÜV test (no loss of flame within 50 seconds after valves were
shut) – lockout: C:150 D:5

Values previously set for the burner’s output at which the test shall be made (pa-
rameter 133 or 134) remain stored.

76/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.6 Fuel trains (application examples)
Gas direct ignition
(Operating mode 1, 7, 14, 19)
Program G Direct ignition

SV V1 V2
P P P
min max SA

Gas pilot ignition 1

(Operating mode 2, 8, 15, 20) Program Gp1 Gas pilot

SV V1 V2
P P P
min max SA
LT

PV

Gas pilot ignition 2

(Operating mode 3, 9, 16, 21) Program Gp2 Gas pilot

SV V1 V2
P P P
max SA
min LT

PV

Fuel valve control program Gas (always modulate)

Pilot ignition 1
Legend for fuel trains:
Gp2 *) Not used
1) Series connection of 2 DC 115 V
V1 V2 valves
2) For Valve proving via pressure
switch-min (Pmin), fitted between fuel
valves (V1 / V2)

LO Light oil
No Normally Open
P LT Valve proving
Pmax Pressure switch-max
Pmin Pressure switch-min
PV Pilot valve
SA Actuator
SV Safety valve (outdoors)
TSA... Safety time
V Fuel valve
Bild 300e/0309

77/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
Light oil direct ignition, 1-stage burner
multistage
(Operating mode 5, 17)
Program LO
V1

P
min

2-stage burner

(Operating mode 5, 17)

Program LO
V2

V1

P
min

3-stage burner

(Operating mode 6, 18)

Program LO
V3

V2

V1

P
min

78/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
Light oil direct ignition, Modulating burner (without shutdown facility for adjustable head)
modulating
(Operating mode 4, 22)
Program LO
V1

P
min
1) 1)

P
max M

(Operating mode 4, 22) Modulating burner (with shutdown facility for adjustable head)

Program LO
V1

P
min
1)

P
max M

Fuel valve control program Light oil (transformer for direct ignition)

LO
Air damper
position

V2

V3
MIN

Stage operation

79/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
Dual fuel burner gas/ light oil
with gas pilot ignition
(Operating mode 3, 9, 16, 21)
Program GP2

P V1-Gas V2-Gas P
P SA
min max
Gas

PV-Gas

(Operating mode 10, 11) Program LOgp

V2-oil

V1-oil
SV-oil

Light oil

Fuel valve control program Light oil (with gas pilot ignition)

V3
PV V1 V2

TSA1

TSA2

V2
MAX
MIN

Stage operation

80/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
Light oil direct ignition Modulating burner (without shutdown facility for adjustable head)
modulating with 2 fuel valves
(Operating mode 12)
Program LO-2V
V1

P
min 1)

V2

1)
P
max M

(Operating mode 12) Modulating burner (with shutdown facility for adjustable head)

Program LO-2V
V1

P
min

V2
P
max M

Fuel valve control program Light oil (transformer for direct ignition)

LO-2V

81/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
Dual fuel burner gas / light oil
with gas pilot ignition with 2
fuel valves
(Operating mode 3, 9, 16, 21) Program GP2

P V1-Gas V2-Gas P
P SA
min max
Gas

PV-Gas

(Operating mode 13) Program LOgp-2V

SV-Oil V1-Oil V2-Oil

Light oil

Fuel valve control program Light oil (with gas pilot ignition)

V3
PV V1 V2

TSA1

TSA2

82/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.7 Sequence diagrams
The phase numbers given in the sequence diagrams can be read from the following
process data:

No. Parameter
961 Phase (state for external module and display)

83/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.7.1 Gas direct ignition «G», «G mod», «G mod pneu»

t1

5s 30 s

RAST plug
Function / Inputs
Pin number

X3-04 Pin 1/2

X5-03 Pin 1/4 R (ON)

X10-05
Pin 2 / Pin 3/4
X10-06 Pin 1/2
X3-02 Pin 1/2 LP p

X5-01 Pin 2/3 P

X5-01 Pin 2/3 P

X5-02 Pin 2/3 P

X9-04 Pin 2/3 P

X5-02 Pin 2/3 POC *)

RAST plug
Function / Outputs
Pin number

X3-05 Pin 1 M

X4-02 Pin 2/3 Z

X6-03 Pin 2/3

X8-02 Pin 1/3 V1

X7-01 Pin 2/3 V2

X7-02 Pin 2/3

X3-05 Pin 2 AL

X54
Fuel

0°

X53
Air

0°

X74

0°

Figure 42: Program for gas direct ignition (G), (G mod), (G mod pneu)

84/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.7.2 Gas pilot ignition 1 «Gp1», «Gp1 mod», «Gp1 mod pneu»

t1

5s 30 s

RAST plug
Function / Inputs
Pin number

X3-04 Pin 1/2

X5-03 Pin 1/4 R (ON)

X10-05
Pin 2 / Pin 3/4
X10-06 Pin 1/2
X3-02 Pin 1/2 LP p

X5-01 Pin 2/3 P

X5-01 Pin 2/3 P

X5-02 Pin 2/3 P

X9-04 Pin 2/3 P

X5-02 Pin 2/3 POC *)

RAST plug
Function / Outputs
Pin number

X3-05 Pin 1 M

X4-02 Pin 2/3 Z

X6-03 Pin 2/3

X8-02 Pin 1/3 V1

X7-01 Pin 2/3 V2

X7-02 Pin 2/3

X3-05 Pin 2 AL
Fuel

X54

0°

X53
Air

0°

X74

0°

Figure 43: Program for gas pilot ignition (Gp1), (Gp1 mod), (Gp1 mod pneu)

85/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.7.3 Gas pilot ignition 2 «Gp2», «Gp2 mod», «Gp2 mod pneu»

t1

5s 30 s

RAST plug
Function / Inputs
Pin number

X3-04 Pin 1/2

X5-03 Pin 1/4 R (ON)

X10-05
Pin 2 / Pin 3/4
X10-06 Pin 1/2
p
X3-02 Pin 1/2 LP

X5-01 Pin 2/3 P

X5-01 Pin 2/3 P

X5-02 Pin 2/3 P

X9-04 Pin 2/3 P

X5-02 Pin 2/3 POC *)

RAST plug
Function / Outputs
Pin number

X3-05 Pin 1 M

X4-02 Pin 2/3 Z

X6-03 Pin 2/3

X8-02 Pin 1/3 V1

X7-01 Pin 2/3 V2

X7-02 Pin 2/3

X3-05 Pin 2 AL
Fuel

X54

0°

X53
Air

0°

X74

0°

Figure 44: Program for gas pilot ignition (Gp2), (Gp2 mod), (Gp2 mod pneu)

86/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.7.4 Light oil direct ignition «Lo», «Lo mod», «Lo 2-stage», «Lo
3-stage»

t1

5s 30 s

RAST plug
Function / Inputs
Pin number

X3-04 Pin 1/2

X5-03 Pin 1/4 R (ON)

X10-05
Pin 2 / Pin 3/4
X10-06 Pin 1/2
X3-02 Pin 1/2 LP p

X5-01 Pin 2/3 P

X5-02 Pin 2/3 P

X5-02 Pin 2/3 POC *)

RAST plug
Function / Outputs
Pin number

X3-05 Pin 1 M

X4-02 Pin 2/3 Z

X6-03 Pin 2/3

X8-02 Pin 1/3 V1

X7-01 Pin 2/3 V2

X7-02 Pin 2/3

X3-05 Pin 2 AL
Fuel

X54

0°

X53
Air

0°

X74

0°

Figure 45: Program for light oil direct ignition (Lo), (Lo mod), (Lo 2-stage), (Lo 3-stage)

87/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.7.5 Light oil pilot ignition «Lo Gp»

t1

5s 30 s

RAST plug
Function / Inputs
Pin number

X3-04 Pin 1/2

X5-03 Pin 1/4 R (ON)

X10-05
Pin 2 / Pin 3/4
X10-06 Pin 1/2
X3-02 Pin 1/2 LP p

X5-01 Pin 2/3 P

X5-02 Pin 2/3 P

X5-02 Pin 2/3 POC *)

RAST plug
Function / Outputs
Pin number

X3-05 Pin 1 M

X4-02 Pin 2/3 Z

X6-03 Pin 2/3

X8-02 Pin 1/3 V1

X7-01 Pin 2/3 V2

X7-02 Pin 2/3

X3-05 Pin 2 AL
Fuel

X54

0°

X53
Air

0°

X74

0°

Figure 46: Program light pilot ignition (Lo Gp)

88/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 6.7.6 Legend to sequence diagrams
6.7.7 Legend to the sequence diagrams

& Note
Not all phases, times, indices, abbreviations and symbols appear in the indi-
vidual sequence diagrams or are needed there!

Phase numbers

00 Lockout phase
02 Safety phase
10 Home run
12 Standby (stationary)
22 Fan motor (M) = ON, safety valve (SV) = ON
24 Air damper (LK) ⇒ fuel valve (V) – position
30 Prepurging
36 Air damper (LK) ⇒ ignition (Z) – position
38 Preignition ignition (Z) = ON
39 Test pressure switch-min (Pmin)
40 Fuel valve (V) = ON
42 Ignition (Z) = OFF
44 Interval 1 (t44)
50 Safety time 2 (TSA2)
52 Interval 2 (t52)
60 Operation 1 (stationary)
62 Operation 2 air damper (LK) ⇒ low-fire (KL) – position
70 Afterburn time (t13)
72 Air damper (LK) ⇒ Rated load (NL) – position
74 Postpurge time (t8)
78 Postpurge time (t3)
80 Evacuation of test space
81 Atmospheric pressure test
82 Filling of test space
83 Gas pressure test
90 Gas shortage waiting time

Valve proving is performed depending on the parameter settings:

Simultaneously with the prepurge time and/or the afterburn time.

Times

TSA1 1st safety time

TSA2 2nd safety time
t1 Prepurge time
t3 Postpurge time
t8 Postpurge time
t13 Afterburn time
t44 Interval 1
t52 Interval 2

89/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 Indices

1) Parameter: Short/long prepurge time for oil only

Short/long on time of oil pump – time
2) Only with valve proving during startup
3) Parameter: With/without alarm in the event of start prevention
4) If signal is faulty in the startup phase, phase 10 is next, otherwise phase 70
5) Max. time safety phase, then lockout
6) Time from occurrence of start prevention to signaling
7) Only in case of valve proving during startup (valve proving via pressure
switch-min)
8) Only in case of startup without valve proving (valve proving via pressure
switch -min)
9) Inverse logic in case of valve proving via pressure switch-min
10) Parameter: Oil pressure min-input
1 = active from phase 38
2 = active from safety time
11) Only with fuel train Lo and 2 fuel valves
12) Parameter 223: Repetition limit value gas pressure switch-min in connection
with gas shortage program parameter 246 (phase 90)
13) Max. drop-in/response time for air pressure switch
14) Alternative to valve proving
15) Alternative to pressure switch-max (Pmax) or POC

Abbreviations

AL Alarm
FS Flame signal
GM Fan motor contactor
LP Air pressure switch
M Fan motor
P LT Pressure switch for valve proving
Pmax Pressure switch-max
Pmin Pressure switch-min
POC Proof of closure
PV Pilot valve
R Temperature or pressure controller
SB Safety limiter
SK Safety loop
STB Safety limit thermostat
SV Safety valve
WM Water shortage
V1 Fuel valve 1
V2 Fuel valve 2
VP Combustion pressure switch
Z Ignition transformer

SA Actuator
SA-K Low-fire position of actuator
SA-N Postpurge position of actuator
SA-R Home position of actuator
SA-V Rated load position of actuator
SA-Z Ignition load position of actuator

90/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 6 Basic unit 15.10.2010
 7 AGM60...
7.1 System with AGM60... and one fuel actuator
AGM60...

LMV...
SQN1...
SQM3...
1
2
3

AIR X53
Air actuator 4
ACT1_OUT_A
ACT1_OUT_B
5
ACT1_IN_A
6
ACT1_IN_B
1
2
3
FUEL X54

Fuel actuator 4
ACT0_OUT_A
ACT0_OUT_B
5
ACT0_IN_A
6
ACT0_IN_B
SQN1...
Bild 314e/1010 SQM3...

Figure 47: LMV36... with AGM60...: System with AGM60... and one fuel actuator

7.2 System with AGM60... and two fuel actuators

AGM60...
SQN1...
SQM3...
1
2
3
ACT0_OUT_A
4
ACT0_OUT_B
5
ACT0_IN_A
6
ACT0_IN_B

LMV... 1
SQN1... 2
SQM3... 3
1 ACT0_OUT_A
4
2 ACT0_OUT_B
5
3 ACT0_IN_A
AIR X53

Air actuator 4
ACT1_OUT_A
ACT0_IN_B
6
ACT1_OUT_B
5
ACT1_IN_A
SQN1...
6
ACT1_IN_B
SQM3...
1 1
2 2
FUEL X54

3 3
Fuel actuator
4 4
5 5
6 6

Bild 315e/1010 AGV61.100

Figure 48: LMV36... with AGM60...: System with AGM60... and two fuel actuator

91/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 7 AGM60... 15.10.2010
 7.3 Connecting cable between AGM60... and
LMV36... basic unit (AGV61.100 cable)
This cable is required when, due to the selected type of fuel train (refer to chapter Selec-
tion of operating mode), 2 fuel actuators are needed.
For that, the 2 fuel actuators must be connected to terminals X54a and X54b of the
AGM60... The AGV61.100 cable is required for making the electrical connection be-
tween the 2 fuel actuators and the basic unit.

If only 1 fuel actuator is used, it must be connected directly to the basic unit.

Connection plug assignment of cable:

1 = pink or alternatively red
2 = white or alternatively black
3 = brown
4 = grey
5 = yellow
6 = green

92/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 7 AGM60... 15.10.2010
 8 Selection of operating mode
To facilitate straightforward adaptation of the LMV36... to different types of burners, the
system offers automatic configuration of the operating mode. This means that – derived
from parameter 201 (fuel 0) / 301 (fuel 1) – the most important settings of configurations
relating to the operating mode are made automatically. Very often in that case, the only
manual settings to be made are those for the fuel-air ratio control system. After selection
of the operating mode, parameters that are not required will be hidden (e.g. oil parame-
ters when firing on gas).

No. Parameter

Burner operating mode (fuel train, modulating / multistage, actuators, etc.)

-- = undefined (delete curves)
1 = G mod
2 = Gp1 mod
3 = Gp2 mod
4 = Lo mod
5 = Lo 2-stage
6 = Lo 3-stage
7 = G mod pneu
8 = Gp1 mod pneu
9 = Gp2 mod pneu
10 = LoGp mod
201
11 = LoGp 2-stage
12 = Lo mod 2 fuel valves
13 = LoGp mod 2 fuel valves
14 = G mod pneu without actuator
15 = Gp1 mod pneu without actuator
16 = Gp2 mod pneu without actuator
17 = Lo 2-stage without actuator
18 = Lo 3-stage without actuator
19 = G mod gas actuator only
20 = Gp1 mod gas actuator only
21 = Gp2 mod gas actuator only
22 = Lo mod oil actuator only
Fuel 1: Burner operating mode (fuel train, modulating / multistage, actuators,
etc.)
-- = undefined (delete curves)
1 = G mod
2 = Gp1 mod
3 = Gp2 mod
4 = Lo mod
5 = Lo 2-stage
6 = Lo 3-stage
7 = G mod pneu
8 = Gp1 mod pneu
9 = Gp2 mod pneu
301 10 = LoGp mod
11 = LoGp 2-stage
12 = Lo mod 2 fuel valves
13 = LoGp mod 2 fuel valves
14 = G mod pneu without actuator
15 = Gp1 mod pneu without actuator
16 = Gp2 mod pneu without actuator
17 = Lo 2-stage without actuator
18 = Lo 3-stage without actuator
19 = G mod gas actuator only
20 = Gp1 mod gas actuator only
21 = Gp2 mod gas actuator only
22 = Lo mod oil actuator only

93/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 8 Selection of operating mode 15.10.2010
 Feedback signal
Operating mode

Fuel actuator
Fuel-air ratio

Air actuator
P201 / P301

Fuel train
Description

control

VSD
Modulating Gas direct ignition, modulating electronic fuel-air ratio control
1 G mod
electronic
● ● ● Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
Modulating Gas pilot ignition 1, modulating electronic fuel-air ratio control
2 Gp1 mod
electronic
● ● ● Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
Modulating Gas pilot ignition 2, modulating electronic fuel-air ratio control
3 Gp2 mod
electronic
● ● ● Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
Modulating Oil direct ignition, modulating electronic fuel-air ratio control
4 Lo mod
electronic
● ● ● Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
Oil direct ignition, electronic 2-stage fuel-air ratio control
5 Lo 2-stage 2-stage ● ● Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
Oil direct ignition, electronic 3-stage fuel-air ratio control
6 Lo 3-stage 3-stage ● ● Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
Modulating Gas direct ignition, modulating pneumatic fuel-air ratio control
7 G mod pneu
pneumatic
● Optional with VSD without speed feedback signal
Gp1 mod Modulating Gas pilot ignition 1, modulating pneumatic fuel-air ratio control
8
pneu pneumatic
● Optional with VSD without speed feedback signal
Gp2 mod Modulating Gas pilot ignition 2, modulating pneumatic fuel -air ratio control
9
pneu pneumatic
● Optional with VSD without speed feedback signal
Modulating Oil pilot ignition, modulating electronic fuel-air ratio control
10 Lo Gp mod
Electronic
● ● ● Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
Lo Gp 2- Oil pilot ignition, 2-stage electronic fuel-air ratio control
11
stufig
2-stage ● ● Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
Modulating Oil direct ignition, 2 fuel valves, modulating electronic fuel-air ra-
12 Lo mod 2V
Electronic
● ● ● tio control. Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
Lo Gp mod Modulating Oil pilot ignition, 2 fuel valves, modulating electronic fuel-air ratio
13
2V Electronic
● ● ● control. Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
Gas direct ignition, without actuator, modulating pneumatic fuel-
Modulating
14 G mod pneu air ratio control. Optional with VSD without speed feedback sig-
pneumatic
nal
Gas pilot ignition 1, without actuator, modulating pneumatic fuel-
Gp1 mod Modulating
15 air ratio control. Optional with VSD without speed feedback sig-
pneu Pneumatic
nal
Gas pilot ignition 2, without actuator, modulating pneumatic fuel-
Gp2 mod Modulating
16 air ratio control. Optional with VSD without speed feedback sig-
pneu Pneumatic
nal
Oil direct ignition, without actuator, 2-stage electronic fuel-air ra-
17 Lo 2-stufig 2-stage ● tio control. Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
Oil direct ignition, without actuator, 3-stage electronic fuel-air ra-
18 Lo 3-stufig 3-stage ● tio control. Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
Modulating Gas direct ignition, firing on gas only, modulating electronic fuel-
19 G mod
Electronic
● ● air ratio control. Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
Gas pilot ignition 1, firing on gas only, modulating electronic
Modulating
20 Gp1 mod
Electronic
● ● fuel-air ratio control. Optional with VSD with speed feedback
signal
Gas pilot ignition 2, firing on gas only, modulating electronic
Modulating
21 Gp2 mod
electronic
● ● fuel-air ratio control. Optional with VSD with speed feedback
signal
Modulating Oil direct ignition, firing on oil only, modulating electronic fuel-air
22 Lo mod
Electronic
● ● ratio control. Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal

(Also refer to chapter Fuel trains)

94/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 8 Selection of operating mode 15.10.2010
 The VSD can be used with any of the operating modes (refer to chapter VSD).

No. Parameter

Activation of VSD / PWM fan

542 0 = inactive
1 = active

& Note
For configuration of the analog output when the VSD is activated, refer to
chapter Load output X74.3!

8.1 Deleting curves

To delete curves, the operating mode must be set to undefined «--». In that case, only
the fuel curves are deleted, the direction of rotation or the reference position of the ac-
tuators is not changed.

95/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 8 Selection of operating mode 15.10.2010
 9 Connection to load controllers
The LMV36... system can be connected to different load controllers. The heat request
and the required burner output are determined in accordance with the priorities of the
different heat sources.

9.1 Controller-on contact X5-03, terminal 1

This contact is given priority over all power sources. A heat request can be made only
when this contact is closed. The contact is safety-related and can also be used in con-
nection with controllers featuring an integrated temperature limiter function.

9.2 Load controller via BAC system X92

To control the LMV36... basic unit, the BAC system can predefine an output via a bus
system. The BAC system is connected to the basic unit via the X92 interface.
Burner startup can take place only when contact X5-03/1 is closed (load controller (LR)
On / Off).
For more detailed information about the connection of BAC systems, refer to chapter
Connection to superposed systems in this document and to the Modbus User Documen-
tation (A7541).

Minimum positioning step

To avoid unnecessary positioning steps of the actuators when the predefined target out-
put varies, a minimum positioning step can be set. The basic unit changes the output
only if the change in target output exceeds the minimum positioning step. The minimum
positioning step only becomes active in modulating operation.

No. Parameter
123.0 Minimum output positioning step: Output building automation

96/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 9 Connection to load controllers 15.10.2010
 Behavior in the event the building automation and control system fails

If the basic unit system receives no more data from the system, it delivers the output set
via parameter 148. The time that elapses until communication breakdown is detected
can be set via parameter 142.

Parameter
142 Setback time in the event of communication breakdown

Setting value:
0 = inactive
1…7200 s
148 Predefined output in the event of communication breakdown with build-
ing automation

Setting values:
For modulating operation, the setting range is as follows:
0…19.9 = burner off
20…100 = 20…100% burner output

For multistage operation, use the following settings:

0 = burner OFF, P1, P2, P3
Invalid = no output predefined by the BAC system in the event of com-
munication breakdown

Default setting: Invalid

149 Fuel 1: Predefined output in the event of communication breakdown with
building automation

Setting values:
For modulating operation, the setting range is as follows:
0…19.9 = burner off
20…100 = 20…100% burner output

For multistage operation, use the following settings:

0 = burner OFF, P1, P2, P3
Invalid = no output predefined by the BAC system in the event of com-
munication breakdown

Default setting: Invalid

Setting choices:
a) Output preset with parameter 148 set undefined (--):
In the event communication breaks down, the last valid preselected output is
maintained. The next load controller activated in accordance with the priority
(refer to chapter Prioritization of load sources) ensures control from this output
position.
b) Output preset via parameter 148 set to 0, 20…100%, or parameterized as mul-
tistage:
If communication breaks down, the output requested by the BAC system is set
invalid and the output set via parameter 148 is delivered.

& Note
In that case, outputs via load controllers with a priority lower than that of the
BAC system cannot be delivered.

97/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 9 Connection to load controllers 15.10.2010
 9.3 Manual output
A manual output can be set with the Normal display of the display and operating unit or
via the PC tool.

Manual output via the display and operating unit

Manual output can be activated or adjusted by keeping the F button depressed for at le-
ast 1 second and by pressing the + or – button.
Output 0 means Manually off.
As long as manual output is active, the output appearing on the normal display blinks.
To deactivate and to change to automatic operation, press Esc for 3 seconds.
If Manually off is activated, it is stored via mains OFF.
On power return, the burner assumes the Manually off position (OFF blinking) (refer to
chapter Operation).

Fuel changeover resets the manual output to Invalid.

Exception:
Setting Manually off is maintained after fuel changeover also.

Activation of Manually off in operation

To activate Manually off, first run the system to the minimum output limit. Then, keep the
F button depressed for at least 1 second and press the – button.

Manually off is activated by releasing the F button and by pressing again the – button.

Caution!
Manually off must not be used by itself to put a burner out of operation when
doing mounting work, or when the burner is not ready for operation. The safety
notes in chapter Safety notes must be observed!

Manual output via the PC tool

Refer to description of the PC tool (J7352).

9.4 Output with curve settings

To set the curves via the display and operating unit or the PC tool, a special parameteri-
zation output is provided. Using this output, it is also possible to approach the point of
ignition. The output is delivered automatically and cannot be set manually. It is only
mentioned here for the sake of completeness.

98/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 9 Connection to load controllers 15.10.2010
 9.5 External load controller via analog input X64.1
/ X64.2
For the preselection of external outputs, an analog 4…20 mA input is provided.
Burner startup can take place only when contact X5-03/1 is closed (load controller (LR)
On / Off).

Switching thresholds / A disruption of the current input or a current signal <3 mA leads to deactivation of the
minimum positioning analog input’s external preselected output. To avoid unnecessary positioning steps of
step the actuators when the input signal varies, it is possible to set a minimum positioning
step for the predefined output. The minimum positioning step only becomes active in
modulating operation. For the external load controller via the analog input, a value of 1%
is preset.

No. Parameter

123.1 Minimum output positioning step: Output external load controller analog
Analog output invalid (4...20 mA)
204 0 = Default output low-fire
1 = Safety shutdown + prevention of startup

LMV...
PWM fan
5
4
X64

3
GND 2
1

Bild 364e/0409

Figure 49: External load controller via analog input X64.1 / X64.2

9.5.1 Thresholds for modulating operation

Actual value Current Display / output value

Low-fire 3...4 mA 20%
Low-fire 4 mA 20%
High-fire 20 mA 100%

99/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 9 Connection to load controllers 15.10.2010
 9.5.2 Switching thresholds for multistage operation

For multistage operation, a hysteresis band about the thresholds is provided. The hys-
teresis band replaces the minimum control step for multistage operation. The band width
is approx. 1 mA.

2-stage operation

Actual value Current Display / output value

Stage 1 5 mA (3...12 mA) P1
Hysteresis band 12...13 mA ---
Stage 2 15 mA (13...20 mA) P2

3-stage operation

Actual value Current Display / output value

Stage 1 5 mA (3...7 mA) P1
Hysteresis band 1 7...8 mA ---
Stage 2 10 mA (8...12 mA) P2
Hysteresis band 2 12...13 mA ---
Stage 3 15 mA (13...20 mA) P3

100/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 9 Connection to load controllers 15.10.2010
 9.6 Prioritization of power sources
To simplify configuration of the system, the power source need not be selected. The
system automatically detects the available power sources and selects them. If several
sources are used, they are selected according to the following priorities:

Parameter 942 Priority Active power source

1 highest Chapter Controller-on-contact X5-03, terminal 1
When the input is activated, the other power
sources are assessed according to their priori-
ties. When the input is deactivated, the burner is
off
1 2 Chapter Output with curve settings
2 3 Chapter Manual output
3 4 Chapter Load controller via the building automa-
tion system X92
4 5 lowest Chapter External load controller via analog input
X64 terminal 1 / terminal 2

The active power source can be read out via parameter 942.

9.6.1 Emergency operation with several load controllers

By making use of the prioritization described above, it is also possible to implement

emergency operation. Should the building automation and control system fail (provided
parameter 148 is set to undefined (--)), the unit switches automatically over to the exter-
nal load controller.
A load controller via analogue input or, if existing via contacts can be connected.

101/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 9 Connection to load controllers 15.10.2010
 10 Electronic fuel-air ratio control
10.1 General
Electronic air-fuel ratio control is used to control the burner’s actuators depending on
burner output. It is possible to connect 2 actuators and, optionally, 1 VSD. Resolution is
0.1° with the actuators and 0.1% with the VSD. Output can be regulated in increments of
0.1% in modulating mode or with a maximum of 3 stages in multistage mode.
To reduce the electric power required for the actuators, they are never operated simul-
taneously, but in successive order, or alternately.

10.2 Behavior outside the operating positions

Outside their operating positions, the actuators approach the different positions in suc-
cessive order. The program phase determines the position to be approached.

10.2.1 Traveling speed

The actuators’ traveling speed is fixed at 5 seconds for covering a positioning angle of
90°.
The ramp speed of the VSD can be adjusted separately for higher and lower speeds.

No. Parameter

522 Ramp up
523 Ramp down

The setting also applies to the operating position (refer to chapter Operating position).

10.2.2 Home position

This position is approached in the Home run (10), Standby (12) and Lockout position
(00) phases.

The position can be set via the following parameters:

Parameter Actuator
501.00 No-flame positions fuel actuator: Home position
502.00 No-flame positions air actuator: Home position
503.00 No-flame speeds VSD: No-load speed
504.00 Fuel 1: No-flame positions fuel actuator: Home position
505.00 Fuel 1: No-flame positions air actuator: Home position
506.00 Fuel 1: No-flame speeds VSD: No-load speed

102/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 10 Electronic fuel-air ratio control 15.10.2010
 10.2.3 Prepurging

This position is approached in phase Traveling to prepurging (24).

The position can be set via the following parameters:

Parameter Actuator
501.01 No-flame positions fuel actuator: Prepurge position
502.01 No-flame positions air actuator: Prepurge position
503.01 No-flame speeds VSD: Prepurge speed
504.01 Fuel 1: No-flame positions fuel actuator: Prepurge position
505.01 Fuel 1: No-flame positions air actuator: Prepurge position
506.01 Fuel 1: No-flame speeds VSD: Prepurge speed

No. Parameter

Gas: Prepurging
222 0 = inactive
1 = active
Oil: Prepurging
262 0 = inactive
1 = active
Fuel 1 gas: Prepurging
322 0 = inactive
1 = active
Fuel 1 oil: Prepurging
362 0 = inactive
1 = active

10.2.4 Ignition

The ignition position is approached in phase Traveling to the ignition position (38).
The position is set via curve parameterization under P0. In modulating operation, this
point is assigned to an output of 10%.

10.2.5 Postpurging

This position is approached in phase Traveling to postpurging (72).

The position can be set via the following parameters:

Parameter Actuator
501.02 No-flame positions fuel actuator: Postpurge position
502.02 No-flame positions air actuator: Postpurge position
503.02 No-flame speeds VSD: Postpurge speed
504.02 Fuel 1: No-flame positions fuel actuator: Postpurge position
505.02 Fuel 1: No-flame positions air actuator: Postpurge position
506.02 Fuel 1: No-flame speeds VSD: Postpurge speed

103/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 10 Electronic fuel-air ratio control 15.10.2010
 10.3 Modulating operation
In modulating mode, it is possible to operate 2 actuators and 1 VSD. The burner‘s out-
put can be regulated between 20.0% (low-fire) and 100.0% (high-fire) in increments of
0.1%. Since the actuators are never allowed to operate simultaneously, the output is in-
creased in small steps of 1%. In the case of an operating ramp of 20% after 100% in 32
seconds, this represents 1 step in 400 ms. Within such an output step, the air actuator is
operated in the first 200 ms, and the VSD and fuel actuator in the second 200 ms.

10.3.1 Definition of curves

The fuel-air ratio curves are defined by 10 curvepoints that are firmly distributed across
the output range.

The following assignment applies:

Curvepoint Output Meaning

P0 10% Point of ignition, not approached in the operating position
P1 20% Low-fire
P2 30%
P3 40%
P4 50%
P5 60%
P6 70%
P7 80%
P8 90%
P9 100% High-fire

The actuator positions can be set with a resolution of 0.1°.

Between the curvepoints, the positions are interpolated in a linear manner.

100
90
80
70
60
Fuel
50 Air
40 VSD
30
Bild 385e/1109

20
10
0
P2 30 %

P3 40 %

P4 50 %

P5 60 %

P6 70 %

P7 80 %

P8 90 %

P9 100 % High-fire
P0 10 % Ignition point

P1 20 % Low-fire

Figure 50: Definition of curves

No. Parameter
401 Ratio control curves fuel actuator (curve setting only)
402 Ratio control curves air actuator (curve setting only)
403 Ratio control curves VSD (curve setting only)
404 Fuel 1: Ratio control curves fuel actuator (curve setting only)
405 Fuel 1: Ratio control curves air actuator (curve setting only)
406 Fuel 1: Ratio control curves VSD (curve setting only)

104/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 10 Electronic fuel-air ratio control 15.10.2010
 10.3.2 Traveling speed/maximum curve slope

The time required for modulating from low-fire to high-fire is 32 seconds.

In connection with the actuator’s ramp in the basic unit, the following positioning angles
or speed changes between maximum 2 curvepoints can be covered:

Type of actuator Positioning speed Positioning angle

Actuator 5 s / 90° 31°
VSD 5 s / 100% 40%
10 s / 100% 20%
20 s / 100% 10%

No. Parameter
522 Ramp up
523 Ramp down

The setting also acts outside the operating position (refer to chapter Traveling speed).

VSD

Between the ignition time (P0) and the low-fire point (P1), a speed differential of up to
40% can be set for the VSD, independent of the selected ramp. This means that the pe-
riod of time from ignition to low-fire can vary between 4…16 seconds (5 to 20 seconds
ramp).

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
84 Bit 0 VSD: Curve too steep in terms of ramp rate
Valency 1
Bit 1 Fuel actuator: Curve too steep in terms of ramp rate
Valency 2…3
Bit 2 Air actuator: Curve too steep in terms of ramp rate
Valency 4…7

The parameterized curve is steeper than permitted with the selected actuator speed.

10.3.3 Entering the running position

The burner is ignited when ignition position P0 is reached. When entering operating pha-
se 60, the actuators follow the defined curves until the low-fire position is reached (20%
or parameter 545 / 565 – lower output limit).

10.3.4 Operating position

As demanded by the load controller, the actuators are driven along the defined 20% and
100% curves. Point of ignition P0 can only be reached via the curve settings.

105/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 10 Electronic fuel-air ratio control 15.10.2010
 10.3.5 Limitation of modulation range

If the modulation range shall be further restricted from 20 to 100% against the defined
curve, 4 parameters are available to define a new low-fire and high-fire position.

No. Parameter

Lower output limit

545
undefined = 20 %
Fuel 1: Lower output limit
565
undefined = 20 %
546 Upper output limit
undefined = 100 %
566 Upper output limit
undefined = 100 %

VSD
100 % High-fire
Upper output
Lower output
20 % Low-fire

limit P546
limit P545

Figure 51: Restriction of modulation range

106/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 10 Electronic fuel-air ratio control 15.10.2010
 10.3.6 Setting the minimum and maximum output
For changes regarding setting of the minimum and maximum output after the
curve settings, note the following:

After leaving the curve settings with completely defined curvepoints, proceed in
modulating operation by setting the minimum / maximum output (parameters 546 /
545 or 566 / 565).

In case of the warm setting, the parameterized output remains active until setting of
the minimum / maximum output is completed. Any change to the minimum / maxi-
mum output is included in the parameterized output. Automatic operation becomes
active only after leaving the minimum / maximum output.
As a result of this procedure, the system maintains the output set by the user, thus
ensuring trouble-free setting of the minimum / maximum output.

Advantages:
- The actual output always corresponds to the currently parameterized minimum /
maximum output or the system output resulting from the curve setting made last,
which means that the output can be ascertained accurately and without interfer-
ence
- The load sources of low priority (contacts, analog input, BAC system output,
manual output) are inactive
- During the curve and the subsequent minimum/maximum output settings, the
Manual OFF function is deactivated
- Unambiguous and easy-to-understand behavior of the system

& Note
If output limitation is not required, the minimum / maximum output need not be
set.
In that case, an undefined minimum / maximum output corresponds to a minimum
output of 20% and a maximum output of 100%.

107/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 10 Electronic fuel-air ratio control 15.10.2010
 10.4 Multistage operation
This operating mode is only available when firing on oil. There is a choice of 2-stage and
3-stage operation. Hence, the burner’s output can be modulated via 2 or 3 stages.
Modulation is accomplished by adjustment of the air actuator or the VSD and by switch-
ing the fuel valves for adjusting the amount of fuel.

10.4.1 Definition of curves

Fuel-air ratio control is defined via the 2 or 3 static output points. To switch the valves on
and off, switch-on and switch-off points must be defined.

The following assignments apply:

Curve- Meaning Valve

point
P0 Point of ignition (not approached in the operating position) V1
P1 Stage 1 V1
P2on Switch-on point stage 2. When the angle exceeds this point, the V1
fuel valve for the second stage is switched on
P2_d Presetting of point P2 with no approach V1
P2 Stage 2 V2
P2of Switch-off point stage 2. When the angle falls below this point, the V2
fuel valve for the second stage is switched off
P3on Switch-on point stage 3. When the angle exceeds this point, the V2
fuel valve for the third stage is switched on
P3_d Presetting of point P3 with no approach V2
P3 Stage 3 V3
P3of Switch-off point stage 3. When the angle falls below this point, the V3
fuel valve for the third stage is switched off

The actuator positions can be set with a resolution of 0.1°, the speeds with a resolution
of 0.1%.

10.4.2 Traveling speed

The air actuator or the VSD is operated like outside the operating position. The defined
ramp speeds are used.
The traveling speed of the actuators is fixed at 5 seconds for a positioning angle of 90°.
The speed of the VSD can be adjusted separately for speed increase or decrease.

No. Parameter

522 Ramp up
523 Ramp down

The setting also acts outside the operating position.

108/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 10 Electronic fuel-air ratio control 15.10.2010
 10.4.3 Adjustment of output

When the output increases, the system moves from the curvepoint of stage 1 (P1) to the
switch-on point of stage 2 (P2on). If the switch-on point is exceeded, the valve for the
second stage is switched on. Then, the system moves to the curvepoint for stage 2 (P2).
When the output decreases, the system moves from the curvepoint of stage 2 (P2) to
the switch-off point of stage 2 (P2of). If this point is crossed, the valve for the second
stage is switched off. Then, the system moves to the curvepoint for stage 1 (P1).
In 3-stage operation, the output between stage 2 and stage 3 is adjusted analogously to
2-stage operation. As static outputs, only P1, P2 and P3 can be approached.
The switch-on and switch-off points are crossed only when changing between stages.
The traveling speeds are fixed. Depending on the positioning angles to be covered, air
actuator and VSD do not reach the operating or switch-on/switch-off points at the same
time. The valves are switched on / off only after both actuators have reached their cor-
rect positions.

When parameterizing the curves, the switch-on points can also be approached in a sta-
tionary manner. In addition, when setting the curve via P2_d (P3_d), curvepoint P2 (P3)
can be readjusted without traveling to it. In that case, the system is at the respective
switch-on point. This procedure is used to reduce the operating time if there is shortage
of air.

Figure 52: Adjustment of output

10.4.4 Entering the operating position

The burner is ignited at ignition position P0. When entering operating phase 60, the ac-
tuators are driven from ignition position P0 to the operating point of stage 1 (P1) at the
respective traveling speed.

10.4.5 Operating position

In the operating position, the burner’s output can be adjusted between operating points
P1 and P2 or P3 in accordance with the load controller’s presetting, as described in
chapter Adjustment of output. Ignition position P0 is not approached anymore. It can
only be reached via curve adjustment.

109/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 10 Electronic fuel-air ratio control 15.10.2010
 10.4.6 Limitation of modulation range

If the modulation range for stage 1 and stage 2, or stage 3, shall be further restricted, 4
parameters can be used to define a new low-fire and high-fire position.

No. Parameter

Lower output limit

545
undefined = 20 %
Fuel 1: Lower output limit
565
undefined = 20 %
546 Upper output limit
undefined = 100 %
566 Fuel 1: Upper output limit
undefined = 100 %

10.5 End of operating position

When there is no more heat request, the system switches to phase 62. Here, the burner
runs down to low-fire as long as possible before the valves are shut.
The available period of time can be set via parameter 212. If this time is set to the mini-
mum value, the burner is immediately shut down if there is no more request for heat. If
the time exceeds 32 seconds, the burner always runs to low-fire. Naturally, it is also
possible to set intermediate times.

No. Parameter

212 Max. time down to low-fire

110/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 10 Electronic fuel-air ratio control 15.10.2010
 10.6 Notes on settings and parameter settings
• When making the settings for the electronic fuel-air ratio control system integrated
in the LMV36..., it must be ensured that sufficient amounts of excess air are avail-
able because over a period of time, the flue gas values are impacted by a number
of factors, such as air density, wear of actuators and controlling elements, etc. For
this reason, the flue gas values initially set must be checked at regular intervals
• To safeguard against accidental or unauthorized transfer of parameters from the pa-
rameter backup of the ACS410 to the LMV36... basic unit, the OEM (burner or boiler
manufacturer) must enter an individual burner identification for every burner.
Only when this requirement is satisfied does the LMV36... system make certain that
the ACS410 does not transfer a parameter set from a plant (with unsuited and pos-
sibly dangerous parameter values) to the LMV36... basic unit
• With the LMV36..., it should be noted that the unit’s characteristics are determined
primarily by the parameter settings and not so much by the type of unit. This means
that – among other considerations – the parameter settings must always be
checked prior to commissioning the plant, and that the LMV36... must never be
transferred from one plant to another without adapting its parameters to the new
plant
• When using the ACS410 PC software, the safety notes given in the relevant Operat-
ing Instructions (J7352) must also be observed
• The parameter level is password-protected. The OEM assigns individual passwords
to the parameter levels he can access. The unit is supplied with default passwords
entered by Siemens; they must be changed by the OEM. These passwords are con-
fidential and may be assigned to authorized personnel only
• The responsibility for setting parameters is assumed by the person who, in accor-
dance with the access rights, has made changes on the respective setting level

In particular, the OEM assumes responsibility for the correct parameter settings
in compliance with the standards covering the specific applications (e.g.
EN 676, EN 267, EN 1643, etc.).

111/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 10 Electronic fuel-air ratio control 15.10.2010
 11 Actuators X53 / X54
One or 2 actuators can be connected to the LMV36... system, depending on the se-
lected operating mode (refer to chapter Selection of operating mode).

Caution!
When mounting the actuators, it must be made certain that the mechanical link
to the controlling elements is form-fitted!

LMV...
1 U_A_SA
2 GND

FUEL X54
Fuel actuator 3 ACT0_OUTA
4 ACT0_OUTB
5 ACT0_IN_A
6 ACT0_IN_B

Bild 324e/1010

Figure 53: Fuel actuator (X54)

When using 2 fuel actuators for each type of fuel, they must be connected to the
AGM60... switch unit (refer to chapter AGM60...). Otherwise, the fuel actuator must be
connected directly to the LMV36...

LMV...

1
2
ACT1_OUT_A
AIR X53

Air actuator 3
4 ACT1_OUT_B
5 ACT1_IN_A
6 ACT1_IN_B
Bild 325e/1010

Figure 54: Air actuator (X53)

11.1 Function principle

The actuators are driven by stepper motors. The resolution reached when making 1 po-
sitioning step is 0.1°. The traveling speed is fixed at 5 seconds for a positioning angle of
90°.
An optical incremental transducer is used to monitor the current position. Due to the use
of a gear train with almost no backlash, position control is not required.

11.2 Definition of angles

The angles and angular ranges are specified in the Data Sheets of the relevant actua-
tors.

SQM33.4…: Refer to Data Sheet N7813

SQN1…: Refer to Data Sheet N7803

Also refer to figure Angle definitions with SQM33...

112/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 11 Actuators X53 / X54 15.10.2010
 11.3 Referencing
An incremental transducer is used for position feedback. This means that referencing of
the actuators must be performed after power-ON. In addition, at the end of each shut-
down in phase 10, the actuators are referenced to ensure that individual stepping errors,
which could lead to shutdown, do not accumulate. If a position error occurs, the system
switches to the safety phase (phase 01), enabling the actuators with detected position
errors to be referenced. During the following phase 10, the only actuators referenced
are those that were not referenced before in the safety phase (phase 01). The position
of the reference point can be selected depending on the type of burner, either the
Closed position (<0°) or the Open position (>90°).

Listed below settings for air apply to both fuels:

• In single-fuel operation or in dual-fuel operation, the parameters 601...606 and 611
are assigned to fuel 0
• In dual-fuel operation, the parameters 608...610 and 612 are assigned to fuel 1

No. Parameter

Selection of reference point

Index 0 = fuel
601 Index 1 = air
0 = closed (<0°)
1 = open (>90°)
Actuator's direction of rotation
Index 0 = fuel
602 Index 1 = air
0 = counterclockwise
1 = clockwise (exclusively for SQM3...)
Tolerance limit of position monitoring (0.1°)
Index 0 = fuel
606 Index 1 = air
Greatest position error where an error is securely detected
→ error detection band: (P606 -0.6°) up to P606
Fuel 1: Selection of reference point
608 0 = closed (<0°)
1 = open (>90°)
Fuel 1: Actuator's direction of rotation
609 0 = counterclockwise
1 = clockwise (exclusively for SQM3...)
Fuel 1: Tolerance limit of position monitoring (0.1°)
610 Greatest position error where an error is securely detected
→ Error detection band: (P606 -0.6°) up to P606
Type of reference
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
611 0 = standard
1 = range stop in the usable range
2 = internal range stop (SQN1…)
3 = both
Fuel 1: Type of reference for fuel actuator
0 = standard
612 1 = range stop in the usable range
2 = internal range stop (SQN1…)
3 = both

113/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 11 Actuators X53 / X54 15.10.2010
 11.3.1 Reference run
Two different reference runs are made to unambiguously determine the actuators’ per-
missible working range. This means that, in the event of a power failure during referenc-
ing, the actuator is prevented from travelling to a range outside the optical feedback sys-
tem or from running against a mechanical stop. Parameters 611 and 612 must be set,
depending on the mechanical design and the type of actuator used. In the case of refer-
ence travel type 1 (parameter 611), the SQM33... and SQN13... actuators first travel 10°
in counterclockwise direction, independent of the selected direction of rotation, the type
of actuator, and the reference point set. The SQN14... actuator first travels 10° clock-
wise.

Reference travel type 1

SQM33... / SQN13... SQN14... Legend

5 4 1

3
2
Reference c Counterclockwise run
range “Open”
1
Reference
range “Closed” 3 d Clockwise run to starting point
2
e Run to reference point
f Run to 0° position
5 g Optional: Run to standby position
Reference
4
range “Open” Reference
range “Closed”

No. Parameter Setting for actuator

SQM33... SQN13... SQN14...
611 Type of referencing
Index 0 = Fuel 0 2 2
Index 1 = Air 0 2 2
612 Fuel 1: Type of referencing for fuel 0 2 2
actuator

With reference travel type 1, the SQM33... and SQN13... actuators first travel 10° in the
clockwise direction when direction of rotation Left and reference point Close or direction
of rotation Right and reference point Open are set. The SQN14... first travels 10° in the
counterclockwise direction. To prevent the actuator from running against a mechanical
stop during referencing, the home position may have to be adjusted (depending on the
direction of rotation and a reference point of about 3° or 87°). In the case of stops within
the usable range, the prepurge or postpurge position must be checked also.

Reference travel type 2

SQM33... / SQN13... SQN14... Legend

4 3 1
Reference

2
2
range “Open”
c Counterclockwise run
Reference
range “Closed” d Run to reference point
1
e Run to 0° position

4
f Optional: Run to standby
position
3
Reference
Reference range “Closed”
range “Open”

No. Parameter Setting for actuator

SQM33... SQN13... SQN14...
611 Type of referencing
Index 0 = Fuel 1 3 3
Index 1 = Air 1 3 3
612 Fuel 1: Type of referencing for fuel 1 3 3
actuator
114/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 11 Actuators X53 / X54 15.10.2010
 Example of actuator with counterclockwise rotation:
When referencing in the CLOSED position, the actuator first travels a certain distance
into the working range (toward the OPEN position). Then, it travels to a position repre-
senting maximum -7.7°, thereby crossing the reference mark for the fist time. Then, the
actuator moves in the other direction again and detects the inner ramp of the reference
mark. This is the reference point used by all positions. If the reference point is param-
eterized in the OPEN position, referencing takes place in a mirror-symmetrical manner.
In that case, the actuator first travels into the working range (toward the OPEN position).
Then, it crosses the reference mark and travels to a position representing maximum
110.6°, then back to the inner ramp of the reference mark.

) Reference range "Close"

n”
pe
“O
g
cin
e 7.7°
ng
en

ra
r
fe

n
re

io
r

Close (0° + 0.6°)

fo

lat
ge

du
ran

Mo

Range stop "Close"

i ng

e)
ng
ork

ra
(w

e
bl
5.6°
.6°

sa
(u
110

°
90

+
18.5°
20.6°

Range stop "Open"

Reference range "Open"

Figure 55: Angle definitions with SQM33…

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
85 0 Referencing error of fuel actuator
1 Referencing error of air actuator
Bit 7 Referencing error due to parameter change
Valency ≥128

115/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 11 Actuators X53 / X54 15.10.2010
 11.4 Direction of rotation
With the SQM3…actuator, the direction of rotation can be selected on an individual ba-
sis.

No. Parameter
602.00 Actuator's direction of rotation
Index 0 = fuel
0 = counterclockwise
1 = clockwise (exclusively for SQM3...)
602.01 Actuator's direction of rotation
Index 1 = air
0 = counterclockwise
1 = clockwise (exclusively for SQM3...)
609.00 Fuel 1: Actuator's direction of rotation
0 = counterclockwise
1 = clockwise (exclusively for SQM3...)

0°

0°

Counterclockwise Clockwise
Figure 56: Direction of rotation (example SQM3…)

With the SQN1… actuators, the direction of rotation to be selected is always Left.

The direction of rotation of the SQN1... actuators depends on the version:

• SQN13...: Direction of rotation Left
• SQN14...: Direction of rotation Right

& Note
The actuators are always supplied with the flat of the drive shaft facing upward.

116/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 11 Actuators X53 / X54 15.10.2010
 11.5 Monitoring the actuator positions
To monitor the actuator’s current positions, an optical incremental transducer with a
resolution of 0.7° is used. The correct position of the drive shaft is ensured by compar-
ing the motor steps made with the position obtained from the incremental transducer.
Due to the different resolutions of motor steps and incremental transducer plus the se-
lected tolerance band, the following error detection band is obtained. The position where
– in the error detection band – shutdown takes place depends on the position currently
required.

For the default setting made in the factory, the error detection band is as follows:

Smallest position error where an error can be detected 0.8°

Greatest position error where an error is securely detected (default setting 1.4°
parameter 606 or 610)

The presetting of 1.4° (default setting, parameter 606 or 610) is suited for use with ac-
tuators type SQM3...

& Note
When using SQN1… actuators equipped with plastic gear trains, we recommend to
change the preset values as follows:

Product no. Value

SQN13.14... 1,7°
SQN14.14... 1,7°
SQN13.17... 2,2°
SQN14.17... 2,2°

When referencing under output conditions, the resilience of the actuator’s gear train
must also be taken into consideration:

Product no. Resilience at max.

rated driving torque
SQM33.41... 0.2°
SQM33.51... 0.2°
SQN13.14... 0.3°
SQN13.17... 0.8°
SQN14.14... 0.3°
SQN14.17... 0.8°

The error detection time is <1 second.

Caution!
This means that – for the design and setting of the burner – a position error re-
sulting from the sum of…
- greatest position error from which an error is detected in all positions,
- resilience at the max. rated torque, and
- mechanical influence from the link between actuator and regulating unit
(e.g. coupling)
must not lead to a critical state in terms of safety.

117/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 11 Actuators X53 / X54 15.10.2010
 No. Parameter
Tolerance limit of position monitoring (0.1°)
Index 0 = fuel
606 Index 1 = air
Greatest position error where an error is securely detected
→ error detection band: (P606 -0.6°) up to P606
Fuel 1: Tolerance limit of position monitoring (0.1°)
610 Greatest position error where an error is securely detected
→ error detection band: (P606 -0.6°) up to P606

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
86 0 Fuel actuator: Position error
87 0 Air actuator: Position error

118/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 11 Actuators X53 / X54 15.10.2010
 11.6 Changing the error detection band for
monitoring the actuator positions
The error detection band can be changed via parameter 606 or 610.
A change is to be made only when using SQN13.17… or SQN14.17… actuators
which, due to their mechanical design, require greater tolerances.
For these types of actuators, set parameter 606 or 610 to 2.2°.

No. Parameter

Tolerance limit of position monitoring (0.1°)

Index 0 = fuel
606 Index 1 = air
Greatest position error where an error is securely detected
→ Error detection band: (P606 -0.6°) up to P606
Fuel 1: Tolerance limit of position monitoring (0.1°)
610 Greatest position error where an error is securely detected
→ Error detection band: (P606 -0.6°) up to P606

11.7 Forced travel

There are errors in the actuators’ feedback unit which can only be detected in connec-
tion with position changes. To be able to also detect such errors when maintaining the
same position for longer periods of time, travel is enforced when, for more than 50 min-
utes, an actuator moves no more than 2.8°. With forced travel, both actuators are driven
2.8° in the direction of smaller positioning angles and back again to the initial angular
position. If a damper is less than 2.8° open, the actuator is driven in the direction of posi-
tive angles in order not to run against mechanical stops, if present. Forced travel lasts a
total of 1 second.

11.8 Detection of line interruptions

The connecting line ensuring position feedback from the actuator to the basic unit is
monitored for interruptions, which means that position feedback cannot fail without being
noticed.

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
86 Bit 0 Line interruption fuel actuator
Valency 1
87 Bit 0 Line interruption air actuator
Valency 1

119/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 11 Actuators X53 / X54 15.10.2010
 11.9 Protection against mixup of actuators
Mixup of actuators can be detected through appropriate installation (using different ref-
erence marks for the air and fuel actuator: OPEN / CLOSED / 0° / 90°). With at least
one of the actuators, the reference mark not used must be blocked by a mechanical
stop. Now, if the actuator connections with the basic unit have been interchanged, one
of the actuators cannot reach the reference mark, which is detected by the basic unit.
Protection against mixup is a question of burner application and must be ensured by the
OEM.

Caution!
To be able to detect mixup of actuators, the burner manufacturer must ensure
that the 2 actuators use opposing reference points. One of the actuators uses
the OPEN reference, the other the CLOSED reference. Approach of the refer-
ence point not used must be blocked with at least one of the actuators!

11.9.1 Proposal for implementation

• Parameterize referencing of the air damper in the CLOSED position

• Parameterize referencing of the fuel damper in the OPEN position. Unnecessary
travel can be avoided by defining a home position of 90° for the fuel damper
• Mechanical stop at the air damper in the range between 90° and 108.5°, and / or
mechanical stop at the fuel damper in the range between 0° and -5.6°

Referencing process

• From any position in the working range (0…90°), but typically from the home posi-
tion, the air damper travels to the -7.7° position and back again to the home position
• From any position in the working range (0…90°), but typically from the home posi-
tion, the fuel damper travels to the 110.6° position and back again to the home posi-
tion

Action in the event of mixup

• The fuel damper (fitted in place of the air damper) travels to the -7.7° position and
back again to the home position
• The air damper (fitted in place of the gas damper) tries to travel to the 110.6° posi-
tion, but is prevented from doing so by the mechanical stop. This is unsuccessful
travel and identified as mixup

The above procedure to prevent mixup of actuators by using different reference posi-
tions is only suited for 2 actuators. In the case of dual-fuel systems with 3 actuators, it
can be employed to prevent mixup of air actuator and fuel actuators OR to prevent
mixup of fuel actuators. With the LMV36..., the above procedure ensures protection
against mixup of air actuator and fuel actuators (different reference positions and me-
chanical stops).

& Note
It is recommended to color-code the actuators’ assignment to the AGM60…, thus pre-
venting mixup of actuators by observing the respective color marks on the AGM60…
and the actuators’ connectors.
Alternatively, protection against mixup of one of the actuators can also be ensured by
a coding pin on the AGM60…

120/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 11 Actuators X53 / X54 15.10.2010
 12 Fan control
12.1 Function principle
Optionally, the LMV36... system can be operated with a VSD or PWM fan. Control is ac-
complished via a DC 0…10 V interface. For control of the fan’s speed, a safety-related
speed feedback signal is required. With pneumatic fuel-air ratio control, the speed feed-
back signal is not evaluated. To facilitate the use of fans with different speed ranges, the
fan’s speed is standardized between 0…100%. If fan control is not connected, a load
output and, alternatively, a fuel meter output are available (refer to chapters Load output
X74.3 and Fuel meter input X75.1/X75.2).

LMV...

5 5
Actual speed

VSD X74
4 4
X64

3 3
2 2
1 1 L Sensor

Sensor disk

VSD

M
Bild 332e/1010
Or

PWM

Figure 57: Function principle of fan control

12.2 Activation of VSD/PWM fan

The VSD can be activated in any of the operating modes (parameters 201 and 301).

No. Parameter

Activation of VSD / PWM fan

542 0 = inactive
1 = active

& Note
For configuration of the analog output when the VSD is activated, refer to chapter
Power output X74.3!

121/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 12 Fan control 15.10.2010
 12.3 VSD control X74.3
The VSD is controlled via a voltage interface (refer to chapter Load output X74.3)!

Depending on the type of VSD used, a release contact is required. This contact can be
controlled via the fan motor contactor. To enable the VSD to bring the fan motor’s speed
to the correct no-load speed, the motor contactor’s drop out delay time must be about
25 seconds.

Example:

Siemens Micromaster 440

22

+24 V 9

5
K1
21

+ 3
Setpoint 0...10 V
4

28
K1

Figure 58: Connection of VSD to the W-FM 50

122/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 12 Fan control 15.10.2010
 12.4 PWM fan control X64.3
The PWM fan is controlled via PWM voltage interface X64.3.

Caution!
The use of PWM fans is only possible in connection with pneumatic air-fuel ra-
tio control!

12.5 Safe separation of mains voltage and protec-

tive extra low-voltage
Caution!
All inputs and outputs of PWM fan control are designed for use with protective
extra low-voltage. For this reason, strict separation from the mains voltage side
must be ensured!

This necessitates an external power supply by the VSD or an external power pack
(X74.1, X74.2).

& Note
Power must also be supplied via X74.1/2 in the case a PWM fan is used.

12.6 Ramp time

The ramp time for fan control can be set separately for acceleration and deceleration
(also refer to chapter Traveling speed/maximum curve slope).

No. Parameter
522 Ramp up
523 Ramp down

If shutdown occurs because the speed has not been reached, the VSD/fan motor might
not be able to follow quickly enough the set ramp.

Remedy:
Shorten further the ramp of the VSD/fan motor or increase the ramp in the basic unit
(parameters 522/523) (also refer to chapter Traveling speed/maximum curve slope).

For VSD operation

Caution!
The ramps parameterized for the VSD should be at least 20% shorter than the
ramps in the LMV36...

Example:

10 s ramp LMV36... 8 s ramp VSD

5 s ramp LMV36... 4 s ramp VSD

123/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 12 Fan control 15.10.2010
 12.7 Acquisition of speed
12.7.1 Acquisition of speed with proximity switch

The actual speed is acquired by an inductive proximity switch which scans a metal sen-
sor disk. The sensor disk must be attached directly to the motor’s drive shaft. Speed ac-
quisition is safety-related. To facilitate the detection of the direction of rotation and to be
able to make the plausibility check with only 1 sensor, a sensor disk with angular steps
of 60°, 120° and 180° is used. It generates 3 pulse intervals of different length.

Speed acquisition is designed for the connection of different types of sensors.

Caution!
With electronic fuel-air ratio control, speed acquisition is safety-related!

We recommend using the AGG5.310 accessory set.

The absolute speed can be read out via the AZL2...

No. Parameter

935 Absolute speed

The current speed in standardized form can be read out via the AZL2...

No. Parameter

936 Standardized speed

Speed input X74.4 Motor speed: 300...6500 rpm

100% speed: 650...6500 rpm
Sensor: Inductive sensor to DIN 19234 (Namur) or
Open Collector (pnp) at UCEsat <4 V, UCEmin >DC 15 V
Power supply: DC 10 V, max. 15 mA
Switching current: >10 mA
Cable length: Max. 3 m (sensor cable must be laid separately!)

Sensor disk

Sensor disk and speed sensor can be ordered as accessory set AGG5.310.

ø5
0
ø4
,3
( 2x
)

Number of tappets: 3
Angular steps: 60°, 120°, 180°
0,1

±2°
Bild 333/0309
Accuracy:

0,1

ø 94
Figure 59: Sensor disk

124/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 12 Fan control 15.10.2010
 Speed sensor

Figure 60: Speed sensor

Selection of fan motor

Motor supplier:

Selection of a motor with threaded hole M8 x 15 at the end of the fan motor’s drive
shaft.

Standard motor and machining (drilling hole and cutting thread M8 x 15).

12.7.2 Acquisition of speed with Hall generator

If the speed is acquired via a Hall generator, the requirements for safety-related applica-
tions are the same as those for the speed feedback signal via sensor disk.
Required is an asymmetric signal with the 3 pulses of 60°, 120° and 180° for detection
of the direction of rotation.

125/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 12 Fan control 15.10.2010
 12.8 Speed control
The LMV36... controls the fan motor’s speed to the setpoint. To ensure that the speed
can still be increased when the maximum speed is reached, the speed is standardized
when the motor is controlled at 95%. Hence, with a speed setpoint of 100%, a speed in-
crease of 5% is still possible.
The control range of the LMV36... is +15% / -10%. If this range is not sufficient, error 80
or 83 can occur.

Error Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV36... system

code
80 1 Control range limitation at the bottom
2 Control range limitation at the top

& Note
Internal control with a VSD or PWM fan motor must not be activated. Otherwise,
speed variations can occur, resulting from simultaneous control actions from both the
basic unit and internal control.

12.9 Speed supervision

The fan’s current speed is acquired by the LMV36... and assessed from a safety point of
view. If the fan does not operate at the speed setpoint, speed control makes a corrective
action, trying to reach the setpoint. If it is not reached within a certain period of time,
safety shutdown is initiated. To ensure a high level of availability and safety, a number
of monitoring bands with different response times are defined.

Speed deviation in % points Shutdown time

0…0.5% Speed reached → no shutdown
0.6...2% <8 s
2.1...10% <3 s
>10% <1 s

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
83 Bit 0 Lower control range limitation of control
Valency 1
Bit 1 Upper control range limitation of control
Valency 2...3
Bit 2 Interruption via disturbance pulses
Valency 4...7
Bit 3 Curve too steep in terms of ramp speed
Valency ≥8
Bit 4 Interruption of speed signal
Valency ≥16
Bit 5 Quick shutdown due to excessive speed deviation
Valency ≥32

126/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 12 Fan control 15.10.2010
 12.10 Setting the parameters of the VSD
If a control signal of 95% (9.5 V) is not sufficient for the burner to deliver its rated capac-
ity, you can proceed as follows:

- Set the maximum frequency to 105.3% of the motor’s rated speed

In the case of a motor frequency of 50 Hz, this means:

Set the maximum frequency of the VSD to 50 Hz x 1.053 = 52.6 Hz (on the VSD).

- Then, standardize the speed (refer to chapter Standardization of speed)

There is no risk of motor overload since only 95% of the maximum control signal is de-
livered during standardization and – later in operation – the effective speed is controlled
and monitored.
Frequencies of between 50 Hz and 52.6 Hz are delivered only if these are needed for
reaching the required speed due to increased output.

- Set the ramp times of the VSD according to chapter Setting the ramp times

127/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 12 Fan control 15.10.2010
 12.11 Standardization of speed
Since the different types of fans operate at different speeds and signal handling should
be as straightforward as possible, all speeds in the system are standardized between 0
and 100%. For this reason, the VSD module uses a parameter which contains the Stan-
dard speed (100% speed). All absolute speeds refer to this speed.

If changes to the VSD or the fan are made, speed standardization should be repeated.

Caution!
• If automatic speed standardization is activated, or if the standardized
speed is changed, the settings of air-fuel ratio control must be checked!
Any change of the standardized speed alters the assignment between the
percentage values parameterized on the curves and the speed
• When the parameter set (refer to ACS J7352) is restored, the standardized
speed is restored also. In that case, new standardization of speed is re-
quired

Automatic speed stan- To facilitate determination of the standardized speed, the LMV36... features automatic
dardization speed standardization. The speed must be standardized while in standby mode. Speed
standardization is integrated in the setting process for electronic fuel-air ratio control, but
can also be started later from the parameter setting level. When using a release contact
for the VSD (external relay at fan output X3-05.1), the fan output is controlled during
speed standardization.

1. Start speed standardization

To start automatic speed standardization, set parameter 641 to 1.

No. Parameter
641 Control of VSD’s speed standardization
Error diagnostics of negative values (refer to error 82)
0 = no speed standardization
1 = speed standardization active

2. Drive the air damper to the prepurge position

Speed standardization begins when the air damper travels to the prepurge position.
When this position is reached, the damper should be fully open so that the fan operates
at full capacity.

3. Control the VSD

Control the VSD at 95% of the maximum voltage.
A margin of 5% allows the speed to be readjusted should environmental conditions
change. This means that full speed (100%) is reached with 95% VSD control (refer to
chapter Setting the parameters of the VSD).

4. Wait until the speed is higher and has stabilized

Before the 100% speed can be measured, the fan must have reached stationary condi-
tions. This means that the fan must operate under stable conditions above 650 rpm.
When this state is reached, a certain waiting time is observed, allowing the speed to
eventually stabilize.

5. Measure the speed and store it

When the speed has stabilized, measure and store it as the Standardized speed (100%
speed).

128/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 12 Fan control 15.10.2010
 6. Close the standardization
When standardization is successfully completed, reset parameter 641 to 0.
If standardization was not successful, parameter 641 assumes a negative value.

The value provides information on the cause of fault:

Value Error Remedy

-1 Timeout of standardization (VSD ramp down Timeout at the end of standardization during ramp down
time too long) of the VSD
→ Ramp time settings of the VSD are not shorter than
those of the basic unit (parameter: 523)
-2 Storage of standardized speed not successful Error during storage of the standardized speed
→ lock the basic unit, then reset it and repeat the
standardization
-3 Line interruption speed sensor Basic unit receives no pulses from the speed sensor.
1. Motor does not run.
2. Speed sensor is not connected.
3. Speed sensor is not actuated by the sensor disk
(check distance).
-4 Speed variation / VSD ramp up time too long / Motor has not reached a stable speed after ramp up.
speed below minimum limit for standardization 1. Ramp time settings of the VSD are not shorter than
those of the basic unit (parameters 522, 523).
2. Characteristic of the VSD is not linear. Configuration
of the voltage input at the VSD must accord with that
of the basic unit (parameter 645).
3. VSD does not follow quickly enough the changes of
the basic unit. Check settings of the VSD
(input filter, slippage compensation, hiding different
speeds)
4. Speed of VSD lies below the minimum for
standardization (650 rpm).
-5 Wrong direction of rotation Motor’s direction of rotation is wrong.
1. Motor turns indeed in the wrong direction
→ change parameterization of the direction of rotation
or interchange 2 live conductors.
2. Sensor disk is fitted the wrong way
→ turn the sensor disk.
-6 Unplausible sensor signals The required pulse pattern (60°, 120°, 180°) has not
been correctly identified.
1. Speed sensor does not detect all tappets of the
sensor disk
→ check distance
2. As the motor turns, other metal parts are detected
also, in addition to the tappets
→ improve mounting.
3. Electromagnetic interference on the sensor lines
→ check cable routing, improve EMC
-7 Invalid standardized speed The standardized speed measured does not lie in the
permissible range.
→ Motor turns too slowly or too fast.
-15 Speed deviation µC1 + µC2 The speeds of microcomputer 1 and 2 deviated too
much. This can be caused by wrong standardized
speeds (e.g. after restoring a data set to a new unit)
→ repeat standardization and check the fuel-air ratio
-20 Wrong phase of phase manager Standardization was made in a wrong phase. Permitted
are only phases ≤12
→ controller OFF, start standardization again
-21 Safety loop / burner flange open Safety loop or burner flange is open
→ repeat standardization with safety loop closed

129/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 12 Fan control 15.10.2010
 Value Error Remedy
-22 Air actuator not referenced Air actuator is not referenced or has lost its reference.
1. Check if the reference position can be approached.
2. Check if actuators have been mixed up.
3. If error only occurs after the start of standardization,
the actuator might be overloaded and cannot reach its
destination.
Standardization was started with VSD deactivated
-23 VSD deactivated
→ activate the VSD and repeat standardization
Standardization was started without valid operation
mode
-24 No valid operation mode
→ activate valid operation mode and repeat
standardization
Standardization was started with pneumatic air-fuel ratio
control
-25 Pneumatic air-fuel ratio control
→ standardization with pneumatic air-fuel ratio control is
not possible
Running command with no preceding stan- VSD is controlled but not standardized
-128
dardization → make standardization
Motor turns but is not standardized
-255 No standardized speed available
→ make standardization

The result of speed standardization (100% speed) can be read out via parameter. The
speeds acquired by the 2 microcontrollers can differ by about 1.5%, the reason being
slightly different resonator frequencies.

No. Parameter
642.0 Standardized speed
Index 0 = speed 1
642.1 Standardized speed
Index 1= speed 2 (internal monitoring)

12.12 Control of fan motor with pneumatic fuel-air

ratio control
If control of the fan motor is employed for burners with pneumatic air-fuel ratio control,
only the control path is used. There is no need to connect a speed feedback signal and
to have speed control (for operating modes, refer to chapter Selection of operating
mode).

130/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 12 Fan control 15.10.2010
 12.13 EMC of LMV36... and VSD
The function and EMC tests with the LMV36... system have been successfully con-
ducted in connection with the following makes and types of VSDs:

Siemens: SED2-0.37 / 22 X
Danfoss: VT2807

During operation, VSDs generate electromagnetic interference on the mains network.

For this reason, the supplier’s specifications must be strictly observed to ensure that
makeup of the system is in compliance with EMC regulations:

Siemens: Operating Instructions → installation conforming to EMC

Danfoss: Technical Brochure → radio suppression filter
Data Sheet on Danfoss EMC filter for long motor cables

Caution!
When using other types of VSD, compliance with EMC regulations and trouble-
free operation are not ensured!

131/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 12 Fan control 15.10.2010
 12.14 Description of connection terminals
12.14.1 VSD
LMV...

5 Power supply for speed sensor

VSD X74
4 Speed input
3 VSD control
2 GND
1 24V EXT

Bild 335e/0409

Figure 61: VSD connection X74

12.14.2 PWM fan

LMV...

5
VSD X74

4
3
2 GND
1 24V EXT

Bild 336/0309

Figure 62: PWM fan X74

LMV...

5 Power supply for sensor

4 Speed feedback
X64

3 PWM speed output

2 GND
1 Controller input 4...20 mA

Bild 337e/0409

Figure 63: PWM fan X64

132/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 12 Fan control 15.10.2010
 13 Load output X74.3
The load output is only available as an alternative to VSD control. If the VSD is deacti-
vated, the output for the VSD delivers the current burner output. The analog output is a
voltage output and – using parameter 645 – can be switched between DC 0…10 V, DC
2…10 V and DC 0/2…10 V.

Parameter 645 Voltage range Remarks

0 DC 0…10 V No detection of line interruption
1 DC 2…10 V Detection of line interruption pos-
sible
2 DC 0/2…10 V No detection of line interruption.
Recommended setting in connec-
tion with Micromaster VSD

& Note
When changing the analog output configuration from DC 0…10 V to DC 2…10 V or
DC 0/2…10 V, the voltage values with modulating, 2-stage and 3-stage operation
change (refer to chapters Modulating operation, 2-stage operation and 3-stage opera-
tion).

Conversion: New value = (initial value * 0.8) + 2

Example: Initially 2 V → (2 * 0.8) + 2 = 3.6 V

Initially 5 V → (5 * 0.8) + 2 = 6 V

13.1 Safe separation of mains voltage and extra

low-voltage
Caution!
The load output is designed for SELV or PELV (refer to chapter Electrical con-
nection of the LMV36... and AGM60...).
For this reason, strict separation from the mains voltage side must be ensured!

This necessitates power supply by an external power pack (X74.1, X74.2).

13.2 Modulating operation

Actual value Voltage Curvepoint Display / output val-
ue
Off DC 0 V --- Off
Ignition load DC 1 V P0 10%
Low-fire DC 2 V P1 20%
High-fire DC 10 V P9 100%

The values between low-fire and high-fire are interpolated in a linear manner.

13.3 2-stage operation

Actual value Voltage Curvepoint Display / output
value
Off DC 0 V --- Off
Stage 1 DC 5 V P1 P1
Stage 2 DC 10 V P2 P2

133/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 13 Load output X74.3 15.10.2010
 13.4 3-stage operation
Actual value Voltage Curvepoint Display / output val-
ue
Off DC 0 V --- Off
Stage 1 DC 3 V P1 P1
Stage 2 DC 5 V P2 P2
Stage 3 DC 10 V P3 P3

134/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 13 Load output X74.3 15.10.2010
 14 Fuel meter input X75.1 / X75.2
A fuel meter can be connected to acquire the amount of fuel burnt.
The fuel meter function is only available as an alternative to VSD control. If the VSD is
deactivated, a fuel meter can be connected to terminals X75.1 and X75.2.

The pulses per volume unit can be set separately for Fuel 0 and Fuel 1. In terms of
hardware, the fuel meter input exists only once however, that is, the change between 2
pulse counters must be made externally. Changeover can be accomplished either via
the fuel selector or an additional contactor at the safety valve output of the AGM60...

LMV...
2 Fuel meter input

X75
1 Sensor supply fuel meter
Bild 338e/0409

Figure 64: Fuel meter input X75

14.1 Configuration of fuel meter

14.1.1 Types of fuel meters

The LMV36... system is designed for use with fuel meters equipped with a Reed con-
tact. Pulse frequency at maximum fuel throughput must be below 300 Hz.

14.1.2 Configuration of pulses per volume unit

Depending on the type of fuel meter used, the number of pulses supplied per m³ or l fuel
must be parameterized. A maximum of 400 pulses per volume unit can be preset. The
correct amount of fuel is acquired only when this parameter is set.

When the parameter is 0, the fuel meter stops.

No. Parameter

128 Fuel meter: Pulse valency (pulses/volume unit)

129 Fuel meter 1: Pulse valency (pulses/volume unit)

14.1.3 Reading and resetting the meter readings

No. Parameter

167 Fuel volume resettable [m³, l, ft³, gal]

177 Fuel 1: Fuel volume resettable (m³, l, ft³, gal)

The cumulated fuel volume can be read out per parameter. The meter reading can also
be reset on the parameter level.

135/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 14 Fuel meter input X75.1 / X75.2 15.10.2010
 14.2 Fuel throughput
With the fuel meter connected, the system calculates continuously the current fuel
throughput. The time required for calculating the fuel throughput varies and lies between
1 and 10 seconds. If the meter delivers no pulses for more than 10 seconds, the display
shows 0 fuel throughput. This means that when fuel throughput is at its minimum, the
sensor should have a pulse frequency of at least 0.1 Hz. The display is smoothed to im-
prove the settling process. With fuel throughput at its maximum, the maximum fre-
quency is 300 Hz.

14.2.1 Configuration

Calculation of fuel throughput is configured based on the pulse valency of the connected
fuel meter.

No. Parameter

128 Fuel meter: Pulse valency (pulses/volume unit)

129 Fuel meter 1: Pulse valency (pulses/volume unit)

When the pulse valency is set to 0.00, the display shows 0 throughput.

14.2.2 Reading out the fuel throughput

The current fuel throughput can be read out via the following parameter on the service
menu:

No. Parameter

960 Fuel throughput in volume unit /h (m³/h, l/h, ft³/h, gal/h)

Display of fuel throughput is possible up to 6553 volume units/h.

& Note
Display of fuel throughput up to a value of 99.9 on the service menu is made with one
decimal place, from 100 with no decimal place.

136/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 14 Fuel meter input X75.1 / X75.2 15.10.2010
 15 Connection and internal diagram
Fuel 1 (oil)
Fuel 0 (gas)

LMV36... AGM60...

X8-02.1
Fuel valve V1 X8-02.1 X32-01.2
X24-04.4

X8-03.1
Fuel valve V1 / V2 X7-01.3 X32-01.3
X24-04.3
Extra
valve (SV)
oil

X6-02.3
Magnetic clutch
Extra valve SV / magnetic clutch X6-03.3 X32-01.5
X24-06.3
Extra valve (SV)
gas
N
X5-01.3

Oilmin
X5-01.2
Pressure switch valve proving (PLT)
X9-04.2 X32-01.4 PLT
or pressure switch-min-oil (Pmin-oil) X9-04.2

Pilot valve PV X7-02.3 X9-04.3

X7-02.2

Fuel selection 0 X5-03.2 X31-02.1

Internal logic X31-01.1
Fuel selection 1 X5-03.3 X31-02.2 Fuel selection for users
(no mains separation)
switch OPEN = fuel 0
Gasmin switch CLOSE = fuel 1
Pressure switch-min-gas (Pmin-gas) X5-01.2 X31-01.4
NT
N X31-01.3
Power sugnal for pressure switch X5-01.3
X31-01.2 X54-a
Externeral load controller ON / OFF X5-03.1 X32-02.1 X54.1-a UAC_SA

Externeral load controller X54.2-a GND

(ON / OFF) X32-02.2 Fuel 1

X54.3-a ACT0_OUT_A

X54.1 X54.4-a ACT0_OUT_B

X54.3 X54.5-a ACT0_IN_A

X54.4 X54.6-a ACT0_IN_B

Fuel X54
X54.5
X54.1-b UAC_SA
X54.6
X54.2-b GND
X54.2
SQN1... / SQM3... Fuel 0 X54.3-b ACT0_OUT_A

X53.1 UAC_SA
X54.4-b ACT0_OUT_B

X53.2 GND
X54.5-b ACT0_IN_A

X53.3 ACT1_OUT_A
X54.6-b ACT0_IN_B
Air
X53.4 ACT1_OUT_B X54-b

X53.5 ACT1_IN_A

X53.6 ACT1_IN_B

POC X5-02.3
Gas and oil
Pressure switch-max-gas / -max-oil or POC X5-02.2 Oilmax
X5-02.2
X32-01.1 Gasmax
X22-02.2
Alternative application
(without POC / with POC) X22-02.3
Oilmax
X5-02.2
Power signal for safety loop X3-04.2 X32-01.1 Gasmax
Water shortage AUX STB
X22-02.2

End switch burner flange

(component of safety loop) X3-03.1
7544z03e/1010

Power signal for

X3-03.2
end switch burner flange

Safety loop X3-04.1

Reset X8-04.1

Figure 65: Inputs and outputs

137/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 15 Connection and internal diagram 15.10.2010
 Shielding:
For shielding the cables on the VSD, refer to:
• Siemens SED2 VSD Commissioning Manual (G5192), chapters 4 and 7, or
• Danfoss Operation Manual VLT 6000 (MG60A703), chapter Installation

138/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 15 Connection and internal diagram 15.10.2010
 16 Special feature: Burner identification
(ID)
The OEM must assign an individual burner identification to every burner. This ensures
that, during backup / restore, incompatible parameter sets cannot be copied between
different burners (also refer to documentation on ACS410 PC tool chapter Backup / Re-
store and in this document chapter Backup / Restore).

No. Parameter

113 Burner identification

17 Connection to superposed systems

17.1 General information and building automation
functions
Communication with a BAC system is made possible via a data link using the COM X92
port and a special interface with galvanic separation and physical bus level adaptation.
This port can be used for connection of a Modbus, depending on the configuration
made.

LMV...
OCI412.10
COM Modbus
X92 RS485

Figure 66: Connection via COM X92 to superposed systems

&
Note
Breakdown of bus communication

If the basic unit detects a breakdown of bus communication, the BAC system must
rewrite the value upon restoration of communication for the Modbus operating mode
and predefined target output

139/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 16 Special feature: Burner identification (ID) 15.10.2010
 & Note
Fuel changeover on the basic unit.

After a change of fuel, the BAC system must rewrite the predefined target output. A
change of fuel can be detected by cyclic sampling of the type of fuel currently burnt.

General setting values for connection of the basic unit to building automation (for factory
settings, refer to the Parameter list):

Bus communication may only be interrupted for the time set.

If communication is disturbed for a longer period of time, the LMV36... basic unit delivers
a fault status message and the values set in the basic unit by building automation are
reset.

No. Parameter

Operating mode BACS

0 = off
141
1 = Modbus
2 = reserved
142 Setback time in the event of communication breakdown

Setting value:
0 = inactive
1…7200 s
148 Default output if communication with building automation is interrupted
Setting values:

For modulating operation the setting range is as follows:

0…19.9 = burner OFF
20…100 = 20…100% burner rating

For multistage operation, the following settings apply:

0 = burner OFF, P1, P2, P3
Invalid = no default output from building automation

Default setting: Invalid

149 Fuel 1: Default output if communication with building automation is inter-
rupted
Setting values:

For modulating operation the setting range is as follows:

0…19.9 = burner OFF
20…100 = 20…100% burner rating

For multistage operation, the following settings apply:

0 = burner OFF, P1, P2, P3
Invalid = no default output from building automation

Default setting: Invalid

The factory settings of the parameters are shown on the Parameter list.

& Note
For a detailed description of parameters 148 and 149, refer to chapter Default output
via building automation.

140/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 17 Connection to superposed systems 15.10.2010
 17.2 Modbus
With this type of bus protocol, the LMV36... basic unit operates as a slave on the Mod-
bus and the transmission mode used is RTU (Remote Terminal Unit).
For more detailed information, refer to the Modbus User Documentation (A7541).

No. Parameter

Device address for Modbus of basic unit

145
Setting value:
1…247
Baud rate for Modbus

146 Setting value:

0 = 9600
1 = 19200
Setting of parity for Modbus communication

Setting value
147
0 = none
1 = odd
2 = even

The factory settings of the parameters are shown on the parameter list.

& Note
If bus communication breaks down, the mode, Modbus operating mode and pre-
defined target output must be rewritten.

141/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 17 Connection to superposed systems 15.10.2010
 18 PC software ACS410
The ACS410 PC software serves primarily as an operating module for the LMV36... sys-
tem, providing the following basic functions:

• Visualization of system state via the following data:

- Parameters
- Process data
• Configuration and parameterization of the basic unit (individual parameters)
• Backup and recovery of parameter sets

& Note
For notes on operation and commissioning, refer to chapter Operation.

Bild 346/0409

Figure 67: Communication with display / BCI (RJ11 jack) (X56)

LMV...

Vx
TXD0
RXD0
GND
BCI
X56

CO

Bild 340/0309

Figure 68: Display input / BCI (RJ11 jack) X56

If communication between the LMV36... and the ACS410 (70 seconds) has broken
down, the password level is reset to Info / Service.

Caution!
Interruption of communication between the LMV36... and the ACS410
(30 seconds) during the time the curves are set leads to lockout!

Error- Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
167 9 Manual locking by the PC tool
Communication breakdown

142/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 18 PC software ACS410 15.10.2010
 19 Error history
The LMV36... system provides an error history in which the last 25 errors are stored.
The first entry represents the current error state and can also be error-free, refer to Error
code list.

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
200 OFF # System error-free

19.1 Error classes

The errors are subdivided into error classes, depending on the severity of the switch-off
response. The current error shows all classes. Only the errors of the most important
classes are included in the history.

Error class Priority Meaning History

0 Highest Lockout ●
1 Safety shutdown with software reset ●
2 Undervoltage
3 Safety shutdown: Safety phase ●
4 Safety shutdown: Start prevention
5 Safety shutdown: Shutdown ●
6 Lowest Message without shutdown response

143/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 19 Error history 15.10.2010
 19.2 Makeup of error history
Parameter Index Description
701 Current error state, can also be error-free
.01 Code (200 = error-free) → refer to Error code list
.02 Diagnostic code → refer to Error code list
.03 Error class → error classes
.04 Phase: Phase in which error occurred → sequence diagrams
.05 Startup counter: (P166) at which the error occurred
.06 Output: Burner output at which the error occurred
.07 Fuel in which error occurred
702 .01..07 Latest error in the history
.
.
.
725 .01..07 Oldest error in the history

Deleting the error history Both the service menu and the parameter setting menu show the error history.
The display on the service menu can be deleted in a way that the only errors shown are
those that occurred after the deletion.
The error history on the parameter setting menu cannot be deleted.
For the deletion, parameter 130 must be set to 1 and then to 2 within 6 seconds.
When the parameter returns to 0, the deletion process is completed.

No. Parameter

Delete display of error history

To delete the display: Set parameter to 1, then to 2
130
Return value 0: Job successfully completed
Return value -1: Timeout of 1_2 sequence

144/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 19 Error history 15.10.2010
 20 Lifecycle function
If the startup counter exceeds a defined threshold, a display error code is set and dis-
played. The error can be acknowledged.
The display code is always set in standby (when there is no heat request). Hence, the
moment the threshold is exceeded, the user is notified that the end of the lifecycle will
soon be reached.

Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
116 0 Designed life time exceeded (250´000 startups)

&
Note
The unit should be replaced when this message appears.

21 Safety notes on use of the AZL2...

Caution!
To prevent the risk of fire and explosions, damage to heating plant or damage
resulting from improper use of the products, ensure that the following safety
notes are observed:

The burner management system covered by the present Basic Documentation

may only be used as specified and only in connection with the appropriate burner
and heating plant.

The burner management system with its display and operating unit and the asso-
ciated heating control system may only be installed and commissioned by author-
ized technical personnel.

The operating unit may only be used in dry spaces. Do not use it outdoors and protect
it against excessive temperatures and frost, and liquids, such as water, oil, fuel oil,
etc.

Follow exactly the procedures and setting notes given in this Basic Documentation.
Appropriately identified settings must only be made by authorized technical person-
nel.

If the display and operating unit is dusty or dirty, clean it with a dry cloth.

Do not carry out any maintenance or repair work on the unit. Such work may only be
performed by authorized technical personnel.

If you have any questions in connection with the display and operating unit, please
contact your heating engineer or refer to one of the addresses given in this Basic
Documentation.

145/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 20 Lifecycle function 15.10.2010
 22 Operating the AZL2... unit
22.1 Description of unit/display and buttons
Function and operation of unit versions AZL21… and AZL23… are identical.

Bild 1/0809
P

/reset
V h min s %
VSD ESC

F A

Figure 69: Description of unit/display and buttons

Button Function
Button F
- For adjusting the fuel actuator
F (keep F depressed and adjust the value by pressing or )
Button A
- For adjusting the air actuator
A (keep A depressed and adjust the value by pressing or )
VSD Buttons A and F: VSD function
- For changing to parameter setting mode P

F A (press simultaneously F and A plus or )

Info and Enter button
- For navigating in info or service mode
* Selection (symbol flashing) (press button for <1 s)
* For changing to a lower menu level (press button for 1…3 s)
* For changing to a higher menu level (press button for 3…8 s)
* For changing the operating mode (press button for >8 s)
/reset - Enter in parameter setting mode
- Reset in the event of fault
- One menu level down
- button
- For decreasing the value
- For navigating during curve adjustments in info or service mode
+ button
- For increasing the value
- For navigating during curve adjustments in info or service mode
ESC + and - button: Escape function

(press and simultaneously)

- No adoption of value
- One menu level up

146/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 22 Operating the AZL2... unit 15.10.2010
22.2 Meaning of symbols on the display

Fault status message

Flame present

Bild 2e/0807
Valve controlled
Ignition controlled
Fan motor controlled
Oil preheater on
Heat request from controllers

Parameter setting mode

Info mode
Service mode

Actuator closing
Actuator opening
Unit of current display

Figure 70: Meaning of display

22.3 Brightness of display

Only available with backlit LCD:

The function of the backlit display is dependent on the type of basic unit.

The brightness of the display can be adjusted from 0…100% using parameter 126.

No. Parameter

126 Display brightness

147/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 22 Operating the AZL2... unit 15.10.2010
 22.4 Special functions

22.4.1 Manual lockout

Press /reset simultaneously with any other but-

ton.
P

The basic unit switches instantly to the lockout

Bild 3/0707
/reset
position, irrespective of the operating position.
plus other button V h min s %

The display shows the fault status message,

except when in parameter setting mode.

22.4.2 Manual control (manual request for output)

Burner is in operation.
P
The display shows oP: on the left, the
Bild 4/0707
percentage of the current output on the right.
V h min s %
Example: oP: 20.0

P Press F for 1 s.
Bild 5/0707

F
1s The display shows LoAd:, the current output
V h min s % flashes.

P Press or to adjust the required

F
and manual output.
Bild 6/0707

V h min s % Example: oP: 23.0

or

P Release F .
Bild 7/0707

The current manual output flashes, indicating

V h min s % that manual control is activated.

ESC

Press for 3 seconds to return to auto-

matic mode.
ESC P
The output no longer flashes.
Bild 8/0707

V h min s %
The display shows oP: on the left, the
percentage value on the right.

Example: oP: 23.0

148/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 22 Operating the AZL2... unit 15.10.2010
 22.5 Timeout for menu operation

The time for automatically leaving the parameter setting level can be adjusted between
10 and 120 minutes, using the following parameter:

No. Parameter

127 Timeout for menu operation

If, during that period of time, there is no operation via the AZL2..., the parameter setting
level is quit and the password level reset to Info / Service.

Caution!
In addition, this timeout or interruption of communication between LMV36... and
the AZL2... during the time the curves are set, leads to lockout!

Error- Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV36... system

code code
167 8 Manual locking by the AZL2...
Timeout / communication breakdown

149/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 22 Operating the AZL2... unit 15.10.2010
 22.6 Backup / restore

Using the ABE W-FM 50, the settings made on the basic unit can be stored (backup)
and then transferred back to the basic unit at a later point in time.

Creating a backup data set

No. Parameter
050.0 Index 0: Creation of backup

The following parameters can be used to read information about the backup data set:

No. Parameter
055 Burner identification of the ABE W-FM 50 backup data set
056 ASN extraction of the ABE W-FM 50 backup data set
057 Software version used when creating the ABE W-FM 50 backup data set

Restoring a backup data set

To transfer a backup data set back to the basic unit, the parameter must be set to 1.

No. Parameter
050.1 Index 1: Execute restore

150/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 22 Operating the AZL2... unit 15.10.2010
 22.6.1 Backup

Parameter 000: flashes.

Display: Parameter 000: flashes, Int does not.

/reset

Only
OEM Press /reset to go to parameter group 041.
level
Display: Parameter 041: flashes, ._._ does not.

Press to select parameter 050

Display: Parameter 050. flashes, index 00: and value 0 do

not.

/reset

Press to select parameter bAC_UP

7548z358/1009

/reset

Display: Parameter bAC_UP

/reset

Press /reset to select the backup process.

Display: Value 0

Press to shift the value in change mode 1 position to

the left.

Display: Value 1 flashes

Note
To detect potential display errors, the value is displayed 1
place shifted to the left.

Press /reset to activate the backup process.

/reset Display: 1 appears

151/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 22 Operating the AZL2... unit 15.10.2010
 After about 5 seconds (depending on the duration of the
program), 0 appears on the display, indicating the end
Approx.
of the backup process.
5s
Display: 0

& Note
If an error occurs during the backup process, a negative value is displayed. For error diagnos-
tics, the cause of the error can be determined from the diagnostic code of error message 137
(see Error code list).

Caution!
We recommend to make a backup whenever a parameter is changed!

152/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 22 Operating the AZL2... unit 15.10.2010
 22.6.2 Restore

Parameter 000: flashes.

Display: Parameter 000: flashes, Int does not.

/reset

Only
OEM Press /reset to go to parameter group 041.
level
Display: Parameter 041: flashes, ._._ does not.

Press to select parameter 050

Display: Parameter 050. flashes, index 00: and value 0 do

not.

/reset

Press to go to parameter bAC_UP

7548z358/1009

/reset

Display: Parameter bAC_UP

Press to select parameter rEStorE

7548z359/1009

Display: Parameter rEStorE

/reset

Press /reset to select the restore process.

Display: Value 0

Press to shift the value in change mode 1 position to

the left.

Display: Value 1 flashes.

Note
To detect potential display errors, the value is displayed 1
place shifted to the left.

153/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 22 Operating the AZL2... unit 15.10.2010
 Press /reset to activate the restore process.

/reset
Display: 1 appears

After about 8 seconds (depending on the duration of the

program), 0 appears on the display, indicating the end of
Ca.
the backup process.
8s
Display: 0

& Note
• Before restoring the backup data on the basic unit, the latter compares the burner identifica-
tion and product no. (ASN) with the burner identification and product no. (ASN) of the backup
data set. If the data accord, they are restored. If not, the restore process is aborted. In case of
abortion, or if an error occurs during the restore process, the display shows a negative value.
For error diagnostics, the cause of the error can be determined from the diagnostic code of
error message 137 (see Error code list). When the restore process is successfully completed,
value 0 appears on the display. The W-FM 50 is supplied with undefined burner identification.
In that case, the restore process from the ABE W-FM 50 is possible without having to enter
the burner identification in the basic unit
• Information Err C: 136 D: 1 (restore started) is displayed for a short moment

Caution!
• On completion of the restore process, the sequence of functions and the parameter
settings must be checked
• When using a VSD, it might be necessary to repeat standardization

154/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 22 Operating the AZL2... unit 15.10.2010
 23 Operation of basic unit via the AZL2...
23.1 Normal display
Normal display is the standard display in normal operation, representing the highest menu level. From the
normal display, you can change to the info, service or parameter level.

23.1.1 Display in standby mode

Unit is in standby mode.

P

Bild 9/0707
Note
V h min s % OFF flashes when the Manual OFF function, the manual
output, or controller OFF is activated.

23.1.2 Display during startup / shutdown

23.1.2.1. Display of program phases

The unit is in phase 22. The controller calls for heat. The
P
bar below the symbol appears. The individual program
Bild 10/0707

phases and controlled components are displayed in accor-

V h min s % dance with the program sequence.

23.1.2.2. Display of program phase with remaining running time until end of the phase is reached

The unit is in phase 30 and shows the remaining running

P
time in that phase.
Bild 11/0808

Example: 12 s, phase 30
V h min s %

155/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 23 Operation of basic unit via the AZL2... 15.10.2010
 23.1.2.3. List of phase displays

Phase Function
Ph00 Lockout phase
Ph02 Safety phase
Ph10 Home run
Ph12 Standby (stationary)
Ph22 Fan ramp up time (122) (fan motor = ON, safety valve = ON)
Ph24 Traveling to the prepurge position
Ph30 Prepurge time
Ph36 Traveling to the ignition position
Ph38 Preignition time
Ph39 Valve proving filling time
(test pressure-switch-min when mounted between fuel valve V1 and fuel valve V2)
Ph40 1st safety time (ignition transformer ON)
Ph42 1st safety time (ignition transformer OFF),
Ph44 Interval 1
Ph50 2nd safety time
Ph52 Interval 2
Ph60 Operation 1 (stationary)
Ph62 Max. time low-fire (operation 2, preparing for shutdown, traveling to low-fire)
Ph70 Afterburn time
Ph72 Traveling to the postpurge position
Ph74 Postpurge time (no extraneous light test)
Ph78 Postpurge time 3 (abortion when load controller ON)
Ph80 Valve proving evacuation time
Ph81 Valve proving test time atmospheric pressure, atmospheric test
Ph82 Valve proving filling test, filling
Ph83 Valve proving test time gas pressure, pressure test
Ph90 Gas shortage waiting time

23.1.3 Display of operating position

P
Display oP stands for Operating position reached.
Bild 12/0707

Modulating mode: Current output in %

V h min s %

P
Display oP: P0 stands for Ignition point.
Bild 13/0707

Multistage operating mode: Current fuel stage

V h min s %

P
Display oP: P1 stands for Stage 1.
Bild 14/0707

Multistage operating mode: Current fuel stage

V h min s %

P
Display oP: P2 stands for Stage 2.
Bild 15/0707

Multistage operating mode: Current fuel stage

V h min s %

P
Display oP: P3 stands for Stage 3.
Bild 16/0707

Multistage operating mode: Current fuel stage

V h min s %

156/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 23 Operation of basic unit via the AZL2... 15.10.2010
 23.1.4 Fault status messages, display of errors and info

23.1.4.1. Display of errors (faults) with lockout

The display shows Loc:, the bar under the fault status
P
message appears.

Bild 17/0707
V h min s % The unit is in the lockout position.

The display shows current error code c: alternating with

P
diagnostic code d: (refer to Flash code list).

Bild 18/0707
V h min s %
Example: Error code 4 / diagnostic code 3

23.1.4.2. Reset

Press /reset for 1...3 s so that rESEt appears on the display.

When you release the button, the basic unit is reset.

P
Bild 19/0707

If you press /reset for >1 s or <1 s, the system returns to the
/reset
1…3 s former menu.
V h min s %

Exception:
If a fault occurs in connection with the curve setting, the sy-
stem returns to the parameter setting level.

23.1.4.3. Activating info / service mode from lockout

/reset
>3 s

P Press /reset for >3 s so that InFo, SEr and then OPErAtE
appear on the display.
Bild 21/0707

/reset
>5 s V h min s % When the button is released, a change to info / service
mode is made.
P
Bild 22/0707

/reset
>8 s V h min s %

157/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 23 Operation of basic unit via the AZL2... 15.10.2010
 23.1.4.4. Error with safety shutdown

The display shows Err:.

The unit initiates safety shutdown.

P The display shows current error code c: alternating with

diagnostic code d:.

Bild 23/0707
V h min s %

Press /reset to return to the normal display.

Example: Error code 12 / diagnostic code 0

23.1.4.5. General information

The unit displays an event which does not lead to

shutdown.

The display shows current error code c: alternating with

diagnostic code d:.

Press /reset to return to the former menu.

Example: Error code 111 / diagnostic ode 0

& Note
For meaning of the error and diagnostic codes, refer to chapter Error code list.
When an error has been acknowledged, it can still be read out from the error history.

23.1.4.6. Prevention of startup

OFF UPr appears if a unit was not programmed or not

P completely parameterized, or its operating mode was re-
Bild 196/0208

set or changed.
The display shows OFF UPr0 or OFF UPr1, depending
V h min s % on the type of fuel currently burnt.

23.1.4.7. Safety loop

P OFF S appears if a unit’s safety loop and / or burner

Bild 197/0208

flange contact is open, and a controller ON signal is pre-

sent.
V h min s %

158/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 23 Operation of basic unit via the AZL2... 15.10.2010
 24 Menu-driven operation
24.1 Assignment of levels
The various levels can be accessed via different button combinations. The parameter level can only be
accessed via password.

Normal display

>1 s
/reset
Change to
normal display

>3 s
Info level <8 s
/reset

>3 s or
<8 s
/reset

or
automatic
return after timeout
Service level of menu operation
(parameter 127)

>8 s

>1 s

Parameter level
Figure 71: Assignment of levels

159/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 24 Menu-driven operation 15.10.2010
 25 Info level
The info level displays information about the basic unit and about operation in general.

& Note
On the info level, you can display the next or the previous parameter by pressing

or .

Instead of pressing , you can also press /reset for <1 s.

& Note
ESC

Press or /reset for >3 s to return to the normal display.

& Note

Bild 27e/0807
V h min s %

Parameter Parameter value

Fig. 72: Info level

No change of values on the info level!

If the display shows below the parameter value, the value may consist of more
than 5 digits.

The value is displayed by pressing /reset for >1 s and <3 s.

ESC

Press /reset for >3 s or press to return to the selection of the parameter
numbers (parameter no. flashes).

160/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 25 Info level 15.10.2010
 No. Parameter
Info level
167 Fuel volume resettable [m³, l, ft³, gal]
162 Operating hours resettable
164 Number of startups resettable
165 Number of startups
177 Fuel 1: Fuel volume resettable (m³, l, ft³, gal)
172 Fuel 1: Operation hours resettable
174 Fuel 1: Number of startups resettable
175 Fuel 1: Number of startups
163 Operating hours when unit is live
166 Total number of startups
113 Burner identification
107 Software version
108 Software variant
102 Identification date
103 Identification number
104 Preselected parameter set: Customer code
105 Preselected parameter set: Version
143 reserved
End

161/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 25 Info level 15.10.2010
 25.1 Display of info level

P
Press /reset until InFo appears.

Bild 28/0707
/reset
1…3 s V h min s % When releasing /reset , you are on the info level.

25.2 Display of info values (examples)

25.2.1 Identification date

The display shows parameter 102: flashing on the

P
left, characters ._._ on the right.

Bild 29/0707
V h min s %
Example: 102: ._._

P Press /reset for 1…3 s to show the identification

Bild 30/0707
date TT.MM.JJ.
/reset /reset
1…3 s V h min s %
Example: Identification date 03.11.05

P ESC
/reset
Bild 29/0707

or Press /reset for >3 s or to return to the

ESC display of parameters.
V h min s %

To the next parameter

25.2.2 Identification number

The display shows parameter 103: flashing on the

P
left, identification number 0 on the right.
Bild 31/0707

V h min s %
Example: 103: 0

Back to the previous

To the next parameter
or /reset parameter
<1s

162/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 25 Info level 15.10.2010
 25.2.3 Burner identification

The display shows parameter 113: flashing on the

P
left, characters ._._ on the right.

Bild 32/0707
V h min s %
Example: 113: ._._

Press /reset for 1…3 s to show the burner’s

P identification.

Bild 33/0707
/reset
Default setting: - - - - - - - -
1…3 s V h min s %

Example: 3

P ESC
/reset

Bild 32/0707
or Press /reset or to return to the display of
ESC parameters.
V h min s %

The burner’s identification can be set on the parameter level!

Back to the previous

To the next parameter
parameter

25.2.4 Number of startups resettable

The display shows parameter 164: flashing on the

left, characters ._._ on the right, since display of
P
the number of startups may comprise more than 5
Bild 34/0707

digits.
V h min s %
Example: Parameter 164: ._._

P Press /reset for 1…3 s to show the number of

Bild 35/0707

startups (resettable).
/reset
1…3 s V h min s %
Example: 36

ESC
P
/reset
Bild 34/0707

or Press /reset or to show parameter 164

ESC flashing again.
V h min s %

The number of startups can be reset on the parameter level!

Back to the previous

To the next parameter
parameter

163/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 25 Info level 15.10.2010
 25.2.5 Total number of startups

The display shows parameter 166: flashing on the

left, characters ._._ on the right, since the display
P
of the total number of startups may comprise

Bild 36/0707
more than 5 digits.
V h min s %
Example: Parameter 166: ._._

P Press /reset for 1…3 s to show the total number of

Bild 37/0707
startups.
/reset
1…3 s V h min s %
Example: 56

ESC
P
/reset

Bild 36/0707
or Press /reset or to return to the display of
ESC parameters.
V h min s %

Back to the previous

To the next parameter
parameter

25.2.6 End of info level

When this display appears, you have reached the

P
end of the info level.
Bild 38/0707

V h min s %
The display shows – End – flashing.

Back to the previous

To the start of the info level
or /reset parameter
<1s

ESC

ESC

or P Press /reset for >3 s or to return to the

Bild 22/0707

normal display.

V h min s %
OPErAtE appears for a short moment.
/reset
>3 s

P When this display appears, you are back on the

normal display and you can change to the next
Bild 9/0707

level mode.
V h min s %

164/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 25 Info level 15.10.2010
 26 Service level

The service level is used to display information about errors including the error history and information about
the basic unit.

& Note

When on the service level, you can press or to display the next or the previous parame-
ter.

Instead of pressing , you can also press /reset for <1 s.

& Note
ESC

Press or /reset for >3 s to return to the normal display.

& Note

P
Bild 39e/0807

V h min s %

Parameter Parameter value

Figure 73: Service level

No change of values on the service level.

If characters are displayed by the parameter, the value may consist of more than 5 digits.

Press /reset for >1 s and <3 s to display the value.

ESC

Press /reset for >3 s or to return to the selection of the parameter number (flashing).

26.1 Display of service level

P
Press /reset for >3 s until SEr appears.
Bild 21/0707

/reset
V h min s % When releasing /reset , you are on the service level.

No. Parameter
Service level
954 Intensity of flame
960 Actual flow rate (fuel throughput in m³/h, l/h, ft³/h, gal/h)
945 Actual fuel
0 = fuel 0
1 = fuel 1
121 Manual output
Undefined = automatic operation
922 Incremental position of actuators
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
936 Standardized speed
161 Number of faults
701 Error history: 701-725.01.Code

165/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 26 Service level 15.10.2010
 26.2 Display of service values (example)
26.2.1 Number of faults

The display shows parameter 161: flashing on

P
the left, the number of faults that occurred thus

Bild 40/0707
far on the right 0.
V h min s % Example: Parameter 161: 0

Back to the previous

To the next parameter
or /reset parameter
<1s

26.2.2 Error history

Refer to chapter Parameter with index, without direct display/Example of parameter 701: Error history!

& Note
Can be deleted for service (refer to chapter Parameter list)!

26.2.3 Intensity of flame

The display shows parameter 954: flashing on the

P left.
On the right, the flame’s intensity is displayed as
Bild 41/0707

a percentage.
V h min s % Example: 954: 0.0

Back to the previous

To the next parameter
or /reset parameter
<1s

& Note
Also refer to chapter Intensity of flame during curve settings.

26.2.4 End of service level

P When this display appears, you have reached the

end of the service level.
Bild 38/0707

Display – End – appears flashing.

V h min s %

To the start of the service Back to the previous pa-

level rameter

ESC
ESC P
Press to return to the normal display.
Bild 22/0707

OPErAtE appears for a short moment.

V h min s %

P When this display appears, you are back on the

normal display and you can change to the next
Bild 9/0707

level mode.
V h min s %

166/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 26 Service level 15.10.2010
 27 Parameter level

The parameters stored in the basic unit can be displayed or changed on the parameter
level.
The change to the parameter level requires a password.

Siemens supplies the LMV36... with the factory settings according to Type summary.

The OEM can change the Siemens default settings to match his own requirements.

With the LMV36..., the basic unit’s characteristics are determined primarily through pa-
rameter settings. Every time the unit is recommissioned, the parameter settings must be
checked. The LMV36... must never be transferred from one plant to another without
matching the unit’s parameters to the new plant.

Caution!
Parameters and settings may only be changed by qualified personnel.
If parameters are changed, responsibility for the new parameter settings is assumed
by the person who – in accordance with the access rights – has made parameter
changes on the respective access level.
After parameterization, the OEM must check to ensure that safe burner operation is
warranted.
The OEM which made the settings is always responsible for the parameters, their set-
tings and compliance of the respective application with the relevant national and in-
ternational standards and safety regulations, such as EN 676, EN 267, EN 1643, etc.
Siemens, its suppliers and other Group Companies of Siemens AG do not assume
responsibility for special or indirect damage, consequential damage, other damage, or
damage resulting from wrong parameter settings.

Warning!
If the factory settings are changed, all changes made must be documented and
checked by the OEM.

The OEM is obliged to mark the unit accordingly and to include at least the list of de-
vice parameters and settings in the burner’s documentation.

Siemens also recommends attaching an additional mark on the LMV36... in the form
of an adhesive label. According to EN 298, the label should be easy to read and wipe
proof.

The label with a maximum size of 70 mm x 45 mm can be attached to the upper part
of the housing.

Example of label: OEM logo

Type / part no.: 1234567890ABCD

Caution! OEM settings:

Parameter no.
225 = 30 s (t1) 226 = 2 s (t3)
230 = 10 s (t4) 234 = 0 s (t8)
240 = 1 (repetition)
257 = 2 s (t3n) TSA = t3n + 0.7 s
259 = 30 s (t11)
260 = 30 s (t12)

167/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 27.1 Entry of password

& Note
The OEM’s password must consist of 5 characters, the heating engineer’s of 4
characters.

VSD
VSD
P
Press button combination to display

Bild 42/0707
F A
F A
CodE.
1s V h min s %

P
When releasing the buttons, 7 bars appear the

Bild 43/1107
first of which flashes.
V h min s %

Bild 44/1207
or Press or to select a number or letter.

V h min s %

/reset

P Press /reset to confirm the value.

Bild 45/1207

The value entered changes to a minus sign (–).

V h min s %
The next bar starts flashing.

P
Bild 46/1207

or Press or to select a number or letter.

V h min s %

/reset
•
•
•
After entry of the last character, the password

P
must be confirmed by pressing /reset .
Bild 47/1207

/reset
V h min s % Example: Password consisting of 4
characters.

168/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 P
As a confirmation of correct entry, PArA appears for a

Bild 48/0707
maximum of 2 seconds.
V h min s %

& Note
For entry of passwords or burner IDs, the following numbers and letters can be used:

=1 =A =L

=2 =b =n

=3 =C =o

=4 =d =P

=5 =E =r

=6 =F =S

=7 =G =t

=8 =H =u

=9 =I =Y

=0 =J

169/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 27.2 Entry of burner identification
The burner’s identification is entered like a password (character by character), but from right to left and
ending with «_».

Parameter 113: flashes.

P

Bild 49/0707
V h min s % Press /reset to go to editing mode.

/reset

P You are on the display for undefined burner

identification.

Bild 50/0707
8 bars appear.
V h min s %

P
Press or to select a number.
Bild 51/0707

or Example: Number 3 flashes.

V h min s %

/reset

P
Press /reset to confirm the value.
Bild 52/0707

V h min s % Make the entry number by number.

P
Press or to select the next number.
Bild 53/0707

or Example: Number 9 flashes.

V h min s %

/reset
•
•
•

P After entry of the last number, burner identifi-

Bild 54/0707

/reset cation must be confirmed by pressing /reset .

V h min s %

170/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 P
The display no longer flashes.

Bild 55/0707
Example: Burner identification 9993
V h min s %

ESC

ESC

P
Press to return to the parameter level.

Bild 49/0707
V h min s %
PArAmeter 113: for burner identification.

27.3 Change of heating engineer’s password

Parameter 041: flashes.
P Bild 56/0707

V h min s % Press /reset to go to level c: for password changes.

Letter n: for new.

Proceed as described in chapter Entry of password and

P
enter the new password (4 characters).
Bild 57/0707

/reset V h min s %
After entry of the last character, the password must be

confirmed by pressing /reset .

Letter r: for repeat.

Proceed as described in chapter Entry of password and

P
repeat entry of the new password.
Bild 58/0707

/reset V h min s %
After entry of the last character, the password must be

confirmed by pressing /reset .

P
SEt confirms that the new password has been saved.
Bild 59/0707

V h min s %

P
Bild 56/0707

Parameter 041: flashes again.

V h min s %

171/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 27.4 Change of OEM’s password
Parameter 042: flashes.
P

Bild 60/0707
V h min s % Press /reset to go to level c: for password changes.

Letter n: for new.

Proceed as described in chapter Entry of password and

P
enter the new password (5 characters).

Bild 60/0707
/reset V h min s %
After entry of the last character, the password must be

confirmed by pressing /reset .

Letter r: for repeat.

Proceed as described in chapter Entry of password and

P
repeat entry of the new password.
Bild 62/0707

/reset V h min s %
After entry of the last character, the password must be

confirmed by pressing /reset .

P
SEt confirms that the new password has been saved.
Bild 59/0707

V h min s %

P
Bild 60/0707

Parameter 042: flashes again.

V h min s %

27.5 Use of parameter level

The parameters stored in the LMV36... basic unit can be displayed and changed on the parameter level.
Normally, all parameters have been set by the burner manufacturer – with the exception of those for the fuel
train and for fuel-air ratio control.
A description of parameter level 400, which is used for setting the fuel train and the fuel-air ratio curve, is
given in chapter Fuel-air ratio curves – settings and commissioning.

172/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 27.6 Structure of parameter levels
The parameters are assigned to different levels.

/reset

Internal parameter
(password level)

Entering the password

/reset

/reset

Basic unit

/reset

Basic unit

Fuel-air ratio curves

(primary setting)
/reset

Bild 384e/1209

/reset

Fuel air ratio

/reset
Actuators

/reset

Error history

/reset

Process data

Note
& The following sections explain the operating philosophy behind the parameter levels using a
number of examples.

Caution!
Pay special attention to chapter Safety notes on settings and parameter settings!
173/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 27.7 Parameters without index, with direct display
27.7.1 Using the example of parameter 208: Program stop

PArAmeter level 200: for basic units.

Press /reset to go to menu

/reset level 200:

P Press to select Program stop.

Bild 64/0707
Display: Parameter 208: flashes, value 0 does
V h min s % not.

/reset

Press /reset to go to editing mode.

P Display:
Bild 65/0707

Program stop time set

Here: Value 0
V h min s % → corresponding to program stop deacti-
vated.

Press or to select the required

program stop time.

P 0 = inactive
1 = PrePurgP (Ph24)
Bild 66/0707

or 2 = IgnitPos (Ph36)
V h min s % 3 = Interv1 (Ph44)
4 = Interv2 (Ph52)

Example: 2 IgnitPos (Ph36)

174/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 ESC

Adopt the value!

↓ /reset ↓ Discard the change!

P P

Bild 67/0707

Bild 68/0707
V h min s % V h min s %
ESC

Press to return to the parameter

level.
Press /reset to return to editing mode.
Display: Parameter 208: flashes, value 0
The value set is adopted. does not.

Note
To detect potential display errors, the value is
displayed 1 place shifted to the right.

Display: Value 2

ESC

ESC

P
Press to return to the parameter level.
Bild 69/0707

PArAmeter 208: flashes, value 2 does not.

V h min s %

ESC

ESC

Press to return to the parameter level.

PArAmeter 200: for basic units.

Back to the previous

To the next parameter level
parameter level

175/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 27.8 Parameters without index, with no direct display
(with parameters having a value range >5 digits)
27.8.1 Using the example of parameter 162: Operating hours resettable

P
PArAmeter level 100: for general.

Bild 70/0707
V h min s %

Press /reset to go to menu

/reset level 100:.

Press to select Operating hours re-

P settable.

Bild 71/0707
Display: Parameter 162: flashes, characters
V h min s % ._._ do not.

/reset

P
Press /reset to go to editing mode.
Bild 72/0707

V h min s % Display: 123457

P You can press or to set the number

of operating hours to 0.
Biod 73/0707

or
V h min s % Display: Operating hours 0 flashes.

176/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 ESC

Adopt the value!

↓ /reset ↓ Discard the change!

P P

Bild 74/0707
Bild 65/0707
V h min s % V h min s %

ESC

Press to return to the parameter

Press /reset to return to editing mode.
level.
The value set will be adopted.
Display: Parameter 162: flashes, characters
._._ do not.
Note
To detect potential display errors, the value is
displayed 1 place shifted to the right.

Display: Value 0

ESC

ESC

P
Press to return to the parameter level.
Bild 70/0707

PArAmeter 100: for general.

V h min s %

177/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 27.9 Parameter with index, with direct display
27.9.1 Using the example of parameter 501: No-flame positions fuel actuator

P
PArAmeter level 500: for fuel-air ratio

Bild 75/0707
control.
V h min s %

/reset

P Press /reset to go to menu level 500:.

Bild 76/0707
Display: Parameter 501. flashes, index 00:
V h min s % and value 0.0 do not.

/reset

P Press /reset to go to the index.

Bild 77/0707

Display: Parameter 501. does not flash, index

V h min s % 00: flashes, value 0.0 does not.

Press or to select the required

index.

P
.00 = home position
Bild 78/0707

or .01 = prepurge position

.02 = postpurge position
V h min s %

Display: Index 01: for prepurge position flas-

hes, value 0.0 does not.

/reset

P
Press /reset to go to editing mode.
Bild 79/0707

V h min s % Display: Value 0.0

P Press or to select the required

prepurge position.
Bild 80/0707

or
V h min s % Example: 1.0

178/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 ESC

Adopt the value!

↓ /reset ↓ Discard the change!

P P

Bild 81/0707

Bild 78/0707
V h min s % V h min s %

ESC

Press to return to the index.

Press /reset to return to editing mode.
Display: Parameter 501. does not flash, index
The value set will be adopted.
01: flashes, value 0.0 has not changed and
does not flash.
Note
To detect potential display errors, the value is
displayed 1 place shifted to the right.

Display: Value 1.0

ESC

ESC

P Press to return to the index.

Bild 82/0707

PArAmeter 501: does not flash, index 01:

V h min s % flashes, value 1.0 does not.

ESC

ESC

P
Press to return to the parameter
level.
Bild 83/0707

Display: Parameter 501. flashes, index 00:

V h min s %
and value 0.0 do not.

ESC

ESC

P Press to return to the parameter

level.
Bild 75/0707

V h min s % PArAmeter 500: for fuel-air ratio control.

179/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 27.10 Parameters with index, with no direct display
27.10.1 Using the example of parameter 701: Errors

Refer to chapter Error code list!

& Note
Can be deleted for service, refer to chapter Parameter list!

P
HIStorie 700: for error history.

Bild 84/0707
V h min s %

Press /reset to go to the pa-

/reset rameter level.

P Press to select parameter 701.

Bild 85/0707

Display: Parameter 701. flashes, index 01: and value 201

V h min s % do not.

/reset

P Press /reset to go to index 01:.

Bild 86/0707

Display: Parameter 701. does not flash, index 01: flas-

V h min s % hes, value 201 does not.

Back to the previous

To the next index
index

Press to select the index:

.01 = error code
.02 = diagnostic code
.03 = error class
P .04 = error phase
Bild 87/0707

.05 = startup counter

.06 = output
V h min s %
Example:
Parameter 701., index 05: for startup counter, diagnostic
code ._._

180/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 /reset

P
Press /reset to go to display mode.

Bild 88/0707
V h min s % Display: Value 56

ESC

ESC

P Press to return to the index.

Bild 87/0707
Display: Parameter 701. does not flash, index 05:
V h min s % flashes, characters ._._ do not.

ESC

ESC

P Press to return to the parameter level.

Bild 89/0707

Display: Parameter 701. flashes index 05: does not,

V h min s % characters ._._ do not.

To the next older error

•
•
•
Parameters cover the period of time back to the last error
P since history was deleted (max. to parameter 725.)
Bild 90/0707

Example:
V h min s % Parameter 725., index 01:, error code 111

Back to the previous

To the next parameter
parameter

P
When this display appears, you have reached the end of
the error history index.
Bild 91/0707

Display – End – appears flashing.

V h min s %

181/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 Back to the previous
To the next parameter
or /reset parameter
<1s

P
When this display appears, you have reached the end of
the error history.

Bild 92/0707
V h min s %
Display – End – appears flashing.

ESC

ESC

P
Bild 93/0707
Press to return to the parameter level.

HISt 700: for error history

V h min s %

Back to the previous

To the next parameter
or /reset parameter
<1s

& Note
If you wish, you can delete the error history via parameter 130.
To delete the display, set the parameter to 1 and then to 2.
The error history is deleted when the parameter returns to 0.

182/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 27.11 Fuel-air ratio curves – settings and commissioning

P
The display shows 400: flashing on the left,

Bild 94/0707
SEt appears on the right.
V h min s %

27.11.1 Initial commissioning

P An unprogrammed unit or a unit whose operating

mode has been reset or changed displays OFF UPR0

Bild 95/0707
or OFF UPR1.
V h min s %

For initial commissioning, change to the parameter level (refer to chapter Operation).
The settings can then be made on parameter level 400.

P
Bild 94/0707
Press /reset to select parameter 400 for initial commis-
/reset sioning and for setting fuel-air ratio control.
V h min s %

P Press /reset to go to the settings for fuel-air ratio control

Bild 96/0707

and parameter 201 for selecting the operating mode.

/reset
V h min s % 201: appears flashing.

183/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 & Note
Ensure that the fuel train is correctly set in compliance with the type of burner used.

No. Parameter Actuator controlled

201 Burner operating mode (fuel train, modulating / multistage,
Air Fuel
actuators, etc.)
-- = undefined (delete curves) ● ●
1 = gas modulating (G mod) ● ●
2 = gas modulating with pilot valve (Gp1 mod) ● ●
3 = gas modulating with pilot valve (Gp2 mod) ● ●
4 = oil modulating (Lo mod) ● ●
5 = oil 2-stage (Lo 2 stage) ● ---
6 = oil 3-stage (Lo 3 stage) ● ---
7 = gas modulating (G mod pneu) ● ---
8 = gas modulating (Gp1 mod pneu) ● ---
9 = gas modulating (Gp2 mod pneu) ● ---
10 = oil modulating with gas pilot (LoGp mod) ● ●
11 = oil 2-stage with gas pilot (LoGp 2-stage) ● ---
12 = oil modulating with 2 fuel valves (Lo mod 2V) ● ●
13 = oil modulating with gas pilot and 2 fuel valves ● ●
(LoGp mod 2V)
14 = gas modulating (G mod pneu, 0 active) --- ---
15 = gas modulating with pilot (Gp1 mod pneu, 0 active) --- ---
16 = gas modulating with pilot (Gp2 mod pneu, 0 active) --- ---
17 = oil 2-stage (Lo 2-stage, 0 active) --- ---
18 = oil 3-stage (Lo 3-stage, 0 active) --- ---
19 = gas modulating only when firing on gas --- ●
(G mod fuel active)
20 = gas modulating with pilot only when firing on gas --- ●
(Gp1 mod fuel active)
21 = gas modulating with pilot only when firing on gas --- ●
(Gp2 mod fuel active)
22 = oil modulating only when firing on oil --- ●
(Lo mod fuel active)

184/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 P

Bild 97/0707
Press /reset to go to editing mode.
/reset
V h min s %

Press or to select the required

P
setting.

Bild 98/0707
or
Example: 3 for gas modulating with pilot valve
V h min s %
(Gp2 mod)

Bild 161/0807
Press /reset to save the selected setting.
/reset
V h min s %

ESC P ESC

Bild 99/0707
Press to return to the parameter level.
V h min s %

To the next parameter

P Press /reset to change to parameter 542: to

activate the VSD.
Bild 100/0807

You can choose:

/reset
V h s min % 0 = VSD OFF
1 = VSD ON

Back to the previous

To the next parameter
parameter

Press to change to parameter 641: to

control speed standardization of the VSD.
You can choose:
P 0 = speed standardization OFF
1 = speed standardization ON
Bild 101/0807

After setting speed standardization to 1, stan-

V h s min % dardization of the VSD commences. If success-
ful, the parameter is reset to 0. Negative values
indicate errors (refer to chapter Automatic
speed standardization).

• For operating modes 1…4, 7…10, 12…16 and 19…22, refer to chapter Setting curvepoints P0, P1
and P9 for modulating mode («G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod» and «Lo mod»)
• For operating modes 5, 6, 11, 17 and 18, refer to chapter Setting the curvepoints for multistage mode
(«Lo 2-stage» and «Lo 3-stage»)

To the next parameter

185/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 27.11.2 Setting curvepoints P0 and P9 for modulating operation («G mod»,
«Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod» and «Lo mod»)

& Note
Not all actuators used in the following example can be set, depending on the se-
lected operating mode.

Example of «G mod»

P Display P0 appears blinking.

Bild 102/0707
Curvepoint for ignition load.
V h min s %

P Keep F depressed.

Bild 103/0707
F You are now in setting P0 of fuel setting F for
V h min s % ignition position P0.

F P Press simultaneously F and or to

and set ignition position P0 of the fuel damper.
Bild 104/0707

or V h min s % Example: 30.0

Release F .
P
Bild 105/0707

The selected value is adopted.

V h min s % Example: 30.0

P Keep A depressed.
Bild 106/0707

A You are now in setting P0 of air actuator A for

V h min s % ignition position P0.

A P Press simultaneously A and or to

and set ignition position P0 of the air actuator.
Bild 107/0707

or V h min s % Example: 22.0

Release A .
P
Bild 108/0707

The selected value is adopted.

V h min s %
Example: 22.0

P Keep F and A depressed.

Bild 109/0807

F and A You are now in setting n0, speed n is for ignition

position n0
V h s min %

186/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 F and A P Press simultaneously F and A and

Bild 110/0807
and
or to adjust speed n0 of the VSD.
V h s min % Example: 20.0
or

P Release F and A .

Bild 111/0807
The selected value is adopted.

V h s min % Example: 20.0

To the next curvepoint

Press .

P9 appears blinking.

P Curvepoint for high-fire.

Bild 112/0707
Same procedure as with P0
V h min s %
Note

If is pressed first, the display jumps to

90!

Back to the previous

To the next curvepoint
curvepoint

Press .

P
The display shows run (identification of start
Bild 113/0707

for setting the curve parameters).

The display shows run Gas0 or run Gas1 or
V h min s %
run Oil0 or run Oil1, depending on the type
of fuel currently burnt or the type of fuel train.

& Note

When pressing /reset , you are given the choice of proceeding with the warm settings
(refer to chapter Warm settings for modulating mode («G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2
ESC

mod» and «Lo mod») or, by pressing , with the cold settings (refer to
chapters Cold settings for «G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod» and «Lo mod»).

27.11.3 Setting curvepoints P0 and P9 for «G mod pneu», «Gp1 mod pneu»
and «Gp2 mod pneu»

Note

& Refer to chapter Setting curvepoints P0 and P9 for modulating operation («G mod», «Gp1
mod», «Gp2 mod» and «Lo mod»)! Here, only the air requires adjustment with A .

187/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 27.11.4 Warm settings for modulating operation («G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2
mod» and «Lo mod»)

& Note
With the warm settings, the burner is started up after pressing the Info button. Air-fuel ratio
control can now be accurately set while the flame is present. When traveling along the precal-
culated curve to high-fire point P9, all intermediate curvepoints (P2…P8) must be set.
Automatic operation is released when – after reaching P9 – the curve settings are quit by
pressing ESC. If the curve settings are aborted earlier (ESC or shutdown due to fault), preven-
tion of startup OFF UPR0 or OFF UPR1 continues to be active until all points are set.
If required, the gas pressure can be set at the high-fire point. In case the gas pressure is
changed, all points must be checked by traveling along the curve downward and – if required
– readjusted.

P
Identification of start for setting the curve parameters.
The display shows run Gas0 or run Gas1 or run Oil0

Bild 113/0707
or run Oil1, depending on the type of fuel currently
burnt or the type of fuel train.
V h min s %

When there is a request for heat.

/reset

& Note
If, during the time the curve is parameterized, an error occurs which leads to safety shutdown,
parameterization of the curve is quit.

P
Bild 114/0707

Phase Standby (stationary)

V h min s %

P
Phase Fan ramp up
Bild 10/0707

(fan motor = ON, safety valve = ON)

V h min s %

P
Bild 115/0707

Phase Traveling to prepurge position

V h min s %

P
Bild 116/0707

Phase Prepurging

V h min s %

188/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 P

Bild 117/0707
Phase Traveling to ignition position

V h min s %

Wait until the burner is operating and symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted!

The startup sequence stops in phase 36 Traveling to ignition position.
The ignition point can be adjusted under cold conditions.

Ignition position P0 can only be set after symbol

F or A ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted.
and

For fuel, keep F depressed, for air A , as

or P
well as for VDS F and A

Bild 118/0707
as well as
Press or to adjust the value.
V h min s %
F and A
When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted,
and
the next curvepoint P1 can be selected with

or .

P
Bild 117/0707

Phase Traveling to ignition position

V h min s %

P
Bild 119/0707

Phase Preignition

V h min s %

P
Bild 120/0707

Phase 1st safety time (ignition transformer ON)

V h min s %

P
Phase 1st safety time (ignition transformer OFF),
Bild 121/0707

preignition time OFF

V h min s %

P
Bild 122/0707

Phase Interval 1

V h min s %

189/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 Starting the warm settings

Ignition position P0 can only be set when

F or A
symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted.
and
For fuel, keep F depressed, for air A , as
or P well as for VSD F and A

Bild 118/0707
as well as
Press or to adjust the value.
V h min s %
F and A
and When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted,
the next curvepoint P1 can be selected with
or .

Low-fire position P1 can only be set when sym-

bol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted.
F or A
and The value is adopted from P0.

or For fuel, keep F depressed, for air A , as

P
Bild 123/0707

as well as well as for VSD F and A

V h min s %
F and A Press or to adjust the value.
and
When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted,
or the next curvepoint P2 can be selected with

Back to the previous

To the next curvepoint
curvepoint

When changing from P1 to P2 for the first time,

P
curvepoints P2…P8 automatically calculated
Bild 124/0707

and saved.
CALC appears for a short moment.
V h min s %

190/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 Air

Figure 74: Setting the curvepoints

& Note
Curvepoints P2 to P8 are automatically computed as a straight line between P1 and P9.

Example 1 = gas modulating

P0, P1 and P9 are set as described: Curvepoint Value 1 Value 2

fuel air
P0 30.0 22.0
P1 32.0 24.0
P9 80.0 90.0

P2 through P8 have automatically been Curvepoint Value 1 Value 2

calculated: fuel air
P2 38.0 32.3
P3 44.0 40.5
P4 50.0 48.8
P5 56.0 57
P6 62.0 65.3
P7 68.0 73.5
P8 74.0 81.8

191/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 Continue the same way with P2 through P9!

F or A High-fire position P9 can only be set when

and symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted.
If required, readjust the gas pressure.

or For fuel, keep F depressed, for air A , as

P

Bild 125/0707
as well as well as for VSD F and A

V h min s %
Press or to adjust the value.
F and A When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted,
and the next curvepoint P8 can be selected with
.
or

After setting the high-fire (P9), either a change to parameter 546 (automatic operation) can be made
(ESC) or all curvepoints can be run through in the reverse order.
If the gas pressure is changed, all points must be checked and – if required – readjusted.

ESC

The maximum capacity is displayed.

If the display shows - - - -, the maximum capac-
P ity has not yet been specified.
The system can be run up to 100%.
Bild 126/0707

V h min s %
You can press /reset to go to editing mode, ena-
bling you to change the maximum capacity.

To the next parameter

The minimum capacity is displayed.

If the display shows - - - -, the minimum
P capacity has not yet been entered.
The system can be run down to 20%.
Bild 127/0707

V h min s %
You can press /reset to go to editing mode,
enabling you to change the minimum capacity.

ESC
Completing parameterization Back to the previous
of the curve parameter

192/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 P
When symbol ▼ or ▲ is no longer highlighted, you can

Bild 94/0707
press ESC a second time.
V h min s %

ESC

Bild 128/0707
V h min s %

The warm settings for fuel-air ratio control by the LMV36... are now completed.

27.11.5 Warm settings for modulating mode («G mod pneu», «Gp1 mod pneu»
and «Gp2 mod pneu»)

Note

& Refer to chapter Warm settings for modulating mode («G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod»
and «Lo mod»)! Here, only the air requires adjustment with A .

27.11.6 Cold settings for «G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod» and «Lo mod»

Note
Refer to chapter Warm settings for modulating mode («G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod»
& and «Lo mod»)!
With no flame, however, no actuator travel and no automatic operation after the settings have
been made.

27.11.7 Cold settings for «G mod pneu», «Gp1 mod pneu» and «Gp2 mod
pneu»

Note
Refer to chapter Warm settings for modulating mode («G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod»

& and «Lo mod»)!

With no flame, however, no actuator travel and no automatic operation after the settings have
been made. Here, only the air requires adjustment with A .

193/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 27.11.8 Interpolation of curvepoints

& Note
Changing a curvepoint in the cold position requires a new approach to all curve-
points in the warm position to verify the change on the burner itself. After changing
the curvepoint, the normal display of the AZL2... shows OFF UPR0 / OFF UPR1.

To the next curvepoint or to select the curvepoint

Bild 129/0707
The selected curvepoint is displayed.

V h min s %

P Keep F depressed.

Bild 130/0707
F The fuel actuator has been selected for
V h min s % changing.

Keep F depressed and press or to

adjust the fuel actuator.
F P
and
Bild 131/0707

In the case of warm settings, the actuator fol-

lows directly the adjustments made.
or V h min s %

The changes are saved.

P
After releasing , the point is selected
Bild 132/0707

again.
V h min s %

P
Keep A depressed.
Bild 133/0707

A
The air actuator has been selected for editing.
V h min s %

Keep A depressed and press or to

adjust the air actuator.
A P
and
Bild 134/0707

In the case of warm settings, the actuator fol-

lows directly the adjustments made.
or V h min s %

The changes are saved.

P
After releasing , the point is selected
Bild 135/0707

again.
V h min s %

Back to the previous

To the next curvepoint
curvepoint
194/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 27.11.9 Interpolating the curvepoints

/reset

P
Identification of start for setting the curve

Bild 113/0707
parameters.
V h min s %

Example 1 = gas modulating

P0, P1 and P9 are set as described: Curvepoint Value 1 Value 2

fuel air
P0 30.0 22.0
P1 32.0 24.0
P9 80.0 90.0

P2 through P8 have automatically been Curvepoint Value 1 Value 2

calculated: fuel air
P2 38.0 32.3
P3 44.0 40.5
P4 50.0 48.8
P5 56.0 57
P6 62.0 65.3
P7 68.0 73.5
P8 74.0 81.8

P5 shall now be changed:

/reset

P
Bild 136/0707

V h min s %

P Keep F or A depressed.
Bild 137/0707

F or A
Example: F
V h min s %

F or A P Press or to change the value as

required.
Bild 138/0707

and

V h min s % Example: 50.0

or

195/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 F and A P Press or to change the value as

Bild 139/0807
and required.

V h s min %
Example: 00.0
or

Release F or A .
P

Bild 140/0707
F or A The required value is adopted.

V h min s % Example: P5:50.0:46.0

P
Keep depressed for >3 s.

Bild 124/0707
>3 s CALC appears.
V h min s %

7´Bild 141/0707
The display jumps to P6.

V h min s %

All curvepoints from P5 to P9 have now been Curvepoint Value 1 Value 2

automatically recalculated (linear interpolation): fuel air
P5 50.0 46.0
P6 57.5 57.0
P7 65.0 68.0
P8 72.0 79.0
P9 80.0 90.0

P
Keep depressed for >3 s.
Bild 124/0707

>3 s CALC appears.

V h min s %

P
Bild 142/0707

The display jumps to P4.

V h min s %

All curvepoints from P1 to P5 have now been Curvepoint Value 1 Value 2

automatically recalculated (linear interpolation): fuel air
P5 50.0 46.0
P4 45.5 40.0
P3 41.0 35.0
P2 36.5 29.5
P1 32.0 24.0

196/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 P

Bild 124/0707
>3 s >3 s
V h min s %

If it is not only the current curvepoint that shall be changed, but all other points in the direction of travel as

well, a new straight line from the current point to P9 (press ) or P1 (press ) can be calculated by

a long push on or .

Display CALC

Example of presentation

P5 up to P9
CALC + Keep
depressed for >3 s
)

CALC - P5 down to P1
Keep
depressed for >3 s

Figure 75: Changing several curvepoints

& Note
Due to interpolation, a number of curvepoints change. The curvepoints
changed must be approached while using the warm settings to be able to
make a check on the burner. If these points have not yet been completely
approached, the normal display of the AZL2... shows OFF UPR 0 / OFF
UPR1.

197/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 27.11.10 Setting of curvepoints for multistage mode («Lo 2-stage» and «Lo 3-
stage»)

Example of «Lo 2-stage»

P
P0 appears blinking.

Bild 143/0707
Curvepoint for ignition load.
V h min s %

P
Keep A depressed.

Bild 144/0707
A You are now at P0 of air actuator A.
V h min s %

A P
Press simultaneously A and or to
and

Bild 145/0707
adjust ignition position P0 of the air actuator.
Example: 20.0
or V h min s %

P
Keep and depressed.
Bild 146/0807

F A

F and A
You are now at n0 of the VSD.
V h min s %

F and A P Press simultaneously F and A and

Bild 147/0807

and
or to adjust speed n0 of the VSD.
V h min s % Example: 20.0
or

P
Now, release A .
Bild 148/0707

The selected value is adopted.

Example: 20.0
V h min s %

P
Identification of start for setting the curve pa-
rameters.
Bild 113/0707

The display shows run Oil0 or run Oil1, de-

V h min s %
pending on the type of fuel currently burnt.

& Note

You are now given the choice of proceeding with the warm settings by pressing /reset
(refer to chapter Warm settings for modulating mode «G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2
ESC

mod» and «Lo mod»), or with the cold settings by pressing (refer to chap-
ter Cold settings for «G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod» and «Lo
mod»).
198/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 27.11.11 Warm settings for «Lo 2-stage» and «Lo 3-stage»

P
Identification of start for setting the curve pa-
rameters.

Bild 113/0707
The display shows run Oil0 or run Oil1, de-
V h min s %
pending on the type of fuel currently burnt.

Provided the controller is enabled!

/reset

Bild 114/0707
Phase Standby (stationary)

V h min s %

P
Phase Fan ramp up

Bild 10/0707
(fan motor = ON, safety valve = ON)
V h min s %

P
Bild 115/0707

Phase Traveling to prepurge position

V h min s %

P
Bild 116/0707

Phase Prepurging

V h min s %

P
Bild 117/0707

Phase Traveling to ignition position

V h min s %

Wait until the burner is operating and symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted! The startup sequence
stops in phase 36 Traveling to ignition position. The ignition point can be adjusted under cold
conditions.

Ignition position P0 can be set only when

A symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted.
and

or Keep A depressed and, for VSD F and A .

P
Bild 149/0707

as well as
Press or to adjust the value.
V h min s %
F and A
When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted,
and the next curvepoint P1 can be selected with

or .

199/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 P

Bild 117/0707
Phase Traveling to ignition position

V h min s %

Bild 119/0707
Phase Preignition

V h min s %

Bild 120/0707
Phase 1st safety time (ignition transformer ON)

V h min s %

P
Bild 122/0707

Phase Interval 1

V h min s %

Ignition position P0 can be set only when

A symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted.
and

or Keep A depressed and, for VSD F and A .

P
Bild 149/0707

as well as
Press or to adjust the value.
V h min s %
F and A
When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer
and highlighted, the next curvepoint P1 can be

or selected with .

200/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 Low-fire position P1 can be set only when
symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted.
A
and Set stage 1 P1.
Fuel valve V1 is switched on.
or P
as well as Keep depressed and, for VSD and .

Bild 150/0707
A F A

F and A
V h min s % Press or to adjust the value.
and When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer
highlighted, the next curvepoint P2on can
or be selected with .

To the next curvepoint

Curvepoint P2on can be set only when

A
symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted.
and Set switch-on point stage 2 P2.
Fuel valve V2 is still off.
or P
as well as Keep depressed and, for VSD and .
Bild 151/0707
A F A

F and A
V h min s % Adjust the value with or .
and When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer
highlighted, the next curvepoint P2_d can
or be selected with .

Back to the previous

To the next curvepoint
curvepoint

Curvepoint P2_d can be set only when

symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted.
A Fuel valve V2 is still off and the system remains
and
at curvepoint P2on. Presetting of operating
stage P2 with no travel, aimed at cutting the
or P operating time if there is shortage of air.
as well as
Bild 152/0707

Keep A depressed and, for VSD F and A .

V h min s %
F and A
Press or to adjust the value.
and
When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer
highlighted, the next curvepoint P2 can be
or
selected with .

201/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 Back to the previous
To the next curvepoint
curvepoint

Curvepoint P2 can only be adjusted when

symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted.
A
and
Fuel valve V2 is switched on.

or P
as well as Keep A depressed and, for VSD F and A .

Bild 153/0707
V h min s %
Press or to adjust the value.
F and A
and When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer
highlighted, the next curvepoint P2of can be
or
selected with .

Back to the previous

curvepoint

Curvepoint P2of is now adjusted.

The system remains at P2.

Adjust the switch-off point with no travel.

P
Bild 154/0707

Now, the point is approached dynamically

when traveling from P2 to P1.
V h min s %

When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer

highlighted, the next curvepoint P1 can be
selected with .

Back to the previous curve-

To the next curvepoint
point

Automatic mode is released when, after

reaching P1, the curve settings are quit with
P ESC.
Bild 155/0707

If the settings are aborted earlier (ESC or

shutdown due to fault), start prevention OFF
V h min s % UPR0 or OFF UPR1 is still active until all
points are set.

ESC

P
When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted,
Bild 94/0707

ESC can be pressed a second time.

V h min s %

202/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
 ESC

Bild 156/0707
V h min s %

The warm settings for fuel-air ratio control of the LMV36... have now been configured.

27.11.12 Cold settings for multistage mode («Lo 2-stage» and «Lo 3-stage»)

Note

& Refer to chapters Warm settings for «Lo 2-stage» and «Lo 3-stage»!
But with no flame, no actuator travel and no automatic operation after the settings
have been made.

27.11.13 Intensity of flame during curve settings

When setting the curve and the curvepoint is displayed, you can press /reset to show the intensity of flame.
When pressing the button for >1 s, a change to parameter 954 is made; when releasing the button, you
return to the curvepoint.

P
Bild 123/0707

Example: Curvepoint Low-flame position P1.

V h min s %

Change to parameter 954

/reset
>1 s

Parameter 954: flashes.

The intensity of flame in % is shown on the right.
Example: 954: 0.0

P
Bild 123/0707

Release /reset to return to curvepoint Low-fire po-

/reset sition P1.
V h min s %

203/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 27 Parameter level 15.10.2010
28 Parameter list LMV36...
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level

no. LMV36... elements Min Max setting

000 Internal parameters
041 Password heating engineer (4 characters) 1 Std_u16 Edit 0 65535 1 OEM
042 OEM password (5 characters) 1 Std_u16 Edit 0 65535 1 OEM
050 Backup / Restore via AZL2... / PC tool starting (parameterizing on 1) 2 Std_s8 Edit -99 2 1 0; 0 SO
Index 0 = store backup
Index 1 = start restore
Error diagnostic via negative value (refer to error code 137)
055 Burner ID of AZL2... backup data record 1 Std_s32 Read only 0 99999999 1 0 SO
056 ASN summary of AZL2... backup data record 8 Std_u8 Read only 0 127 1 0 SO
057 Software version when setting the AZL2... backup data record 1 Hex_16 Read only 0x100 0xFFF9 1 0 SO

204/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level

no. LMV36... elements Min Max setting

100 General
102 Identification date 1 Date Read only 0 255 1 Info / Service
103 Identification number 1 Std_u16 Read only 0 65535 1 Info / Service
104 Preselected parameter set: Customer code 1 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 9 Info / Service
105 Preselected parameter set: Version 1 Hex_16 Read only 0 0xFFFF 1 V 01.05 Info / Service
107 Software version 1 Hex_16 Read only 0x100 0xFFF9 1 V 03.30 Info / Service
108 Software variant 1 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 2 Info / Service
111 ASN summary for verification with AZL2... backup data restore 8 Std_u8 Read only 0 127 1 0 SO
113 Burner identification 1 Std_s32 Edit 0 99999999 1 undefined Info / Service
Password level
write: SO
121 Manual output 1 Output Edit / clear 0% 100% 0.1% undefined Info / Service
Undefined = automatic mode
123 Minimum output positioning step 3 Output Edit 0% 100 % 0.1 % 0 %; 1 %; 0 % SO
Index 0 = output building automation
Index 1 = output external load controller analog
Index 2 = reserved
124 Loss of flame test (TÜV test) starting (parameterized on 1) 1 Std_s8 Edit -6 1 1 0 SO
(switch off the fuel valves → loss of flame)
Error diagnostic via negative value (refer to error code 150)

125 Mains frequency 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 0 SO

0 = 50 Hz
1 = 60 Hz
126 Display brightness 1 Std_u8 Edit 0% 100% 1% 100 % SO
127 Timeout for menu operation 1 Std_u8 Edit 10 min 120 min 1 min 60 min OEM
128 Fuel meter: Pulse valency [pulses / volume unit] 1 Std_u16 Edit 0 400 0.01 0 SO

129 Fuel meter 1: Pulse valency [pulse / unit of volume] 1 Std_U16 Edit 0 400 0.01 0 SO

205/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level

no. LMV36... elements Min Max setting

130 Delete display of error history 1 Std_s8 Edit -5 2 1 0 SO
To delete the display: Set parameter to 1, then to 2
Return value 0: Job successfully completed
Return value -1: Timeout of 1_2 sequence
133 Default output at TÜV test 1 Output Edit / clear 20 % 100 % 0.1 % Undefined SO
Invalid = TÜV test at active output
2000...10000 = low-fire...high-fire or stage 1 / stage 2 / stage 3
134 Fuel 1: Default output at TÜV test 1 Output Edit / clear 20 % 100 % 0.1 % Undefined SO
Invalid = TÜV test at active output
2000...10000 = low-fire...high-fire or stage 1 / stage 2 / stage 3
141 Operating mode BACS 1 Selection Edit 0 2 1 0 SO
0 = off
1 = Modbus
2 = reserved
142 Setback time in the event of communication breakdown 1 Std_u16 Edit 0s 7200 s 1s 120 s SO (BA)

Setting value:
0 = inactive
1…7200 s
143 reserved 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 8 1 1 Info / Service
144 reserved 1 Std_u16 Edit 10 s 60 s 1s 30 s SO
145 Device address for Modbus of basic unit 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 247 1 1 SO

Setting value:
1…247
146 Setting of Baud rate for Modbus communication 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 SO

Setting values
0 = 9600
1 = 19200

206/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level

No. LMV36... elements Min Max setting

147 Setting of parity for Modbus communication 1 Selection Edit 0 2 1 0 SO

Setting value
0 = none
1 = odd
2 = even
148 Default output if communication with building automation is interrupted 1 Output Edit / clear 0% 100% 0.1% undefined SO (BA)

Setting values
For modulation operation the setting range is as follows:
0…19.9 = burner off
20…100 = 20…100% burner rating

For multistage operation apply to setting range:

0 = burner OFF, P1, P2, P3
Invalid = no default output predefined by building automation

Default setting: Invalid

207/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level

No. LMV36... elements Min Max setting

149 Fuel 1: Default output if communication with building automation is in- 1 Output Edit / clear 0% 100% 0.1% undefined SO (BA)
terrupted

Setting values
For modulation operation the setting range is as follows:
0…19.9 = burner off
20…100 = 20…100% burner rating

For multistage operation apply to setting range:

0 = burner OFF, P1, P2, P3
Invalid = no default output predefined by building automation

Default setting: Invalid

161 Number of faults 1 Std_u16 Read only 0 65535 1 0 Info / Service
162 Operating hours resettable 1 Std_s32 Reset 0h 9999999 h 1h 0h Info / Service
163 Operating hours when unit is live 1 Std_s32 Read only 0h 9999999 h 1h 0h Info / Service
164 Number of startups resettable 1 Std_s32 Reset 0 9999999 1 0 Info / Service
165 Number of startups 1 Std_s32 Read only 0 9999999 1 0 Info / Service
166 Total number of startups 1 Std_s32 Read only 0 9999999 1 0 Info / Service
167 Fuel volume resettable [m³, l, ft³, gal] 1 Std_s32 Reset 0 99999999 1 0 Info / Service
172 Fuel 1: Operation hours resettable 1 Std_s32 Reset 0h 9999999 h 1h 0h Info / Service
174 Fuel 1: Number of startups resettable 1 Std_s32 Reset 0 9999999 1 0 Info / Service
175 Fuel 1: Number of startups 1 Std_s32 Read only 0 9999999 1 0 Info / Service
177 Fuel 1: Fuel volume resettable (m³, l, ft³, gal) 1 Std_s32 Reset 0 99999999 1 0 Info / Service
186 Software drop out delay of flame signal (100 ms) 2 Std_u8 Edit 0 20 1 0; 0 OEM
Index = = QRB... (0 = inactive, >1)
Index 1 = ION / QRA... (0 = inactive, >3 - only 200 ms-steps)
187 Fuel 1: Software drop out delay of flame signal (100 ms) 2 Std_u8 Edit 0 20 1 0; 0 OEM
Index = = QRB... (0 = inactive, >1)
Index 1 = ION / QRA... (0 = inactive, >3 - only 200 ms-steps)

208/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level

No. LMV36... elements Min Max setting

200 Basic unit
201 Burner operating mode (fuel train, modulating / multistage, actuators, 1 Selection Edit / clear 1 22 1 undefined SO
etc.)
-- = undefined (delete curves)
1 = G mod
2 = Gp1 mod
3 = Gp2 mod
4 = Lo mod
5 = Lo 2-stage
6 = Lo 3-stage
7 = G mod pneu
8 = Gp1 mod pneu
9 = Gp2 mod pneu
10 = LoGp mod
11 = LoGp 2-stage
12 = Lo mod 2 fuel valves
13 = LoGp mod 2 fuel valves
14 = G mod pneu without actuator
15 = Gp1 mod pneu without actuator
16 = Gp2 mod pneu without actuator
17 = Lo 2-stage without actuator
18 = Lo 3-stage without actuator
19 = G mod gas actuator only
20 = Gp1 mod gas actuator only
21 = Gp2 mod gas actuator only
22 = Lo mod oil actuator only
204 Analog output invalid (4...20 mA) 1 Std_U8 Edit 0 1 1 1 SO
0 = Default output load-fire
1 = Safety shutdown + prevention of startup
208 Program stop 1 Selection Edit 0 4 1 0 SO (BA)
0 = inactive
1 = PrePurgP (Ph24)
2 = IgnitPos (Ph36)
3 = interval 1 (Ph44)
4 = interval 2 (Ph52)

209/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level

No. LMV36... elements Min Max setting

210 Alarm in the event of start prevention 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 SO
0 = inactive
1 = active
211 Fan ramp up time 1 Time Edit 2s 60 s 0.2 s 2s SO
212 Max. time down to low-fire 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 10 min 0.2 s 45 s SO
213 Waiting time home run 1 Time Edit 2s 60 s 0.2 s 2s OEM
214 Max. time start release 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 10 min 0.2 s 35 s OEM
215 Repetition limit safety loop 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 16 1 1 SO
1 = no repetition
2...15 = number of repetitions
16 = constant repetition
217 Max. waiting time for detection of detector or pressure signal (e.g. 1 Time Edit 5s 10 min 0.2 s 30 s OEM
home run, preignition «Lo»)
221 Gas: Active detector flame evaluation 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 SO
0 = QRB
1 = ION / QRA
222 Gas: Prepurging 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 SO
0 = inactive
1 = active
223 Repetition limit gas pressure switch-min 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 16 1 1 SO
1 = no repetition
2...15 = number of repetitions
16 = constant repetition
225 Gas: Prepurge time 1 Time Edit 20 s 60 min 0,2 s 30 s SO
226 Gas: Preignition time 1 Time Edit 0.4 s 60 min 0,2 s 2s SO
227 Gas: Safety time 1 (TSA1) 1 Time Edit 1s 10 s 0,2 s 5s OEM
229 Gas: Time to respond to pressure faults within safety time 1 (TSA1) 1 Time Edit 0.4 s 9.6 s 0,2 s 1,8 s OEM
and safety time 2 (TSA2)
230 Gas: Interval 1 1 Time Edit 0.4 s 60 s 0,2 s 2s SO
231 Gas: Safety time 2 (TSA2) 1 Time Edit 1s 10 s 0,2 s 7s OEM
232 Gas: Interval 2 1 Time Edit 0.4 s 60 s 0,2 s 2s SO
233 Gas: Afterburn time 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 60 s 0.2 s 8s SO
234 Gas: Postpurge time (no extraneous light test) 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 108 min 0.2 s 15 s SO

210/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level
no. LMV36... elements Min Max setting
236 Gas: Pressure switch-min input 1 Selection Edit 1 2 1 1 SO
0 = inactive
1 = pressure switch-min (before fuel valve 1 (V1))
2 = valve proving via pressure switch-min (between fuel
valve 1 (V1) and fuel valve 2 (V2))
237 Gas: Pressure switch-max / POC input 1 Selection Edit 1 3 1 1 SO
0 = inactive
1 = pressure switch-max
2 = POC
239 Gas. Forced intermittent operation 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 SO
0 = inactive
1 = active
240 Repetition limit loss of flame 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 2 1 1 OEM
1 = no repetition
2 = 1 repetition
241 Gas: Execution valve proving 1 Selection Edit 0 3 1 0 SO
0 = no valve proving
1 = valve proving on startup
2 = valve proving on shutdown
3 = valve proving on startup and shutdown
242 Gas: Valve proving evacuation time 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 10 s 0.2 s 3s OEM
243 Gas: Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 60 s 0.2 s 10 s OEM
244 Gas: Valve proving filling time 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 10 s 0.2 s 3s OEM
245 Gas: Valve proving time test gas pressure 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 60 s 0.2 s 10 s OEM
246 Gas: Waiting time gas shortage 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 60 s 0.2 s 10 s OEM
248 Gas: Postpurge time (t3) (abortion if load controller On) 1 Time Edit 1s 108 min 0.2 s 1s SO
261 Oil: Active detector of flame evaluation 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 0 SO
0 = QRB
1 = ION / QRA
262 Oil: Prepurging 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 OEM
0 = inactive
1 = active
265 Oil: Prepurge time 1 Time Edit 15 s 60 min 0.2 s 30 s SO
266 Oil: Preignition time 1 Time Edit 0.6 s 60 min 0,2 s 2s SO
267 Oil: Safety time 1 (TSA1) 1 Time Edit 1s 15 s 0,2 s 5s OEM

211/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level
no. LMV36... elements Min Max setting
269 Oil: Time to respond to pressure faults within safety time 1 (TSA1) and 1 Time Edit 0.4 s 14.6 s 0,2 s 1,8 s OEM
safety time 2 (TSA2)
270 Oil: Interval 1 1 Time Edit 0.4 s 60 min 0,2 s 2s SO
271 Oil: Safety time 2 (TSA2) 1 Time Edit 1s 15 s 0,2 s 10 s OEM

272 Oil: Interval 2 1 Time Edit 0.4 s 60 min 0,2 s 2s SO

273 Oil: Afterburn time 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 60 s 0.2 s 8s SO
274 Oil: Postpurge time (no extraneous light test) 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 108 min 0.2 s 15 s SO
276 Oil: Pressure switch-min input 1 Selection Edit 1 2 1 1 SO
0 = inactive
1 = active from phase 38
2 = active from safety time (TSA)
277 Oil: Pressure switch-max/POC input 1 Selection Edit 1 2 1 1 SO
0 = inactive
1 = pressure switch-max
2 = POC
279 Oil: Forced intermittent operation 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 SO
0 = inactive
1 = active
280 Repetition limit value loss of flame 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 2 1 2 OEM
1 = no repetition
2 = 1 repetition
281 Oil: Point in time oil is ignited 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 0 SO
0 = short preignition (Ph38)
1 = long preignition (with fan) (Ph22)
284 Oil: Postpurge time 3 (abortion if load controller On) 1 Time Edit 1s 108 min 0.2 s 1s SO
285 Oil: gas pressure switch-min with «Lo Gp» 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 0 SO
0 = inactive
1 = active

212/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password
No. LMV36... elements Min Max setting level
300 Basic unit
301 Fuel 1: Burner operating mode (fuel train, modulating / multistage, actuators, etc.) 1 Selection Edit / clear 1 22 1 Undefined SO
-- = undefined (delete curves)
1 = G mod
2 = Gp1 mod
3 = Gp2 mod
4 = Lo mod
5 = Lo 2-stage
6 = Lo 3-stage
7 = G mod pneu
8 = Gp1 mod pneu
9 = Gp2 mod pneu
10 = LoGp mod
11 = LoGp 2-stage
12 = Lo mod 2 fuel valves
13 = LoGp mod 2 fuel valves
14 = G mod pneu without actuator
15 = Gp1 mod pneu without actuator
16 = Gp2 mod pneu without actuator
17 = Lo 2-stage without actuator
18 = Lo 3-stage without actuator
19 = G mod gas actuator only
20 = Gp1 mod gas actuator only
21 = Gp2 mod gas actuator only
22 = Lo mod oil actuator only
321 Fuel 1 gas: Active detector of flame evaluation 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 SO
0 = QRB
1 = ION / QRA
322 Fuel 1 gas: Prepurging 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 SO
0 = inactive
1 = active
323 Repetition limit value gas pressure switch-min 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 16 1 1 SO
1 = no repetition
2...15 = number of repetitions
16 = constant repetition
325 Fuel 1 gas: Prepurge time 1 Time Edit 20 s 60 min 0.2 s 30 s SO
326 Fuel 1 gas: Preignition time 1 Time Edit 0.4 s 60 min 0.2 s 2s SO

213/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password
No. LMV36... elements Min Max setting level
327 Fuel 1 gas: Safety time 1 (TSA1) 1 Time Edit 1s 10 s 0.2 s 5s OEM
329 Fuel 1 gas: Time to respond to pressure faults within safety time 1 (TSA1) and 1 Time Edit 0.4 s 9.6 s 0.2 s 1.8 s OEM
safety time 2 (TSA2)
330 Fuel 1 gas: Interval 1 1 Time Edit 0.4 s 60 s 0.2 s 2s SO
331 Fuel 1 gas: Safety time 2 (TSA2) 1 Time Edit 1s 10 s 0.2 s 7s OEM
332 Fuel 1 gas: Interval 2 1 Time Edit 0.4 s 60 s 0.2 s 2s SO
333 Fuel 1 gas: Afterburn time 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 60 s 0.2 s 8s SO
334 Fuel 1 gas: Postpurge time (no extraneous light test) 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 108 min 0.2 s 15 s SO
336 Fuel 1 gas: Pressure switch-min input 1 Selection Edit 1 2 1 1 SO
0 = inactive
1 = pressure switch-min (before fuel valve 1 (V1))
2 = valve proving via pressure switch-min (between fuel valve 1 (V1) and fuel valve
2 (V2))
337 Fuel 1 gas: Pressure switch-max / POC input 1 Selection Edit 1 3 1 2 SO
0 = inactive
1 = Pressure switch-max
2 = POC
339 Fuel 1 gas. Forced intermittent operation 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 SO
0 = inactive
1 = active
340 Repetition limit value loss of flame 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 2 1 1 OEM
1 = no repetition
2 = 1 repetition
341 Fuel 1 gas: Execution valve proving 1 Selection Edit 0 3 1 0 SO
0 = no valve proving
1 = valve proving on startup
2 = valve proving on shutdown
3 = valve proving on startup and shutdown
342 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving evacuation time 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 10 s 0.2 s 3s OEM
343 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 60 s 0.2 s 10 s OEM
344 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving filling time 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 10 s 0.2 s 3s OEM
345 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving time test gas pressure 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 60 s 0.2 s 10 s OEM
346 Fuel 1 gas: Waiting time gas shortage 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 60 s 0.2 s 10 s OEM
348 Fuel 1 gas: Postpurge time (t3) (abortion if load controller ON) 1 Time Edit 1s 108 min 0.2 s 1s SO

214/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password
No. LMV36... elements Min Max setting level
Fuel 1 oil: Active detector of flame evaluation
361 0 = QRB 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 SO
1 = ION / QRA
Fuel 1 oil: Prepurging
362 0 = inactive 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 OEM
1 = active
365 Fuel 1 oil: Prepurge time 1 Time Edit 15 s 60 min 0.2 s 30 s SO
366 Fuel 1 oil: Preignition time 1 Time Edit 0.6 s 60 min 0.2 s 2s SO
367 Fuel 1 oil: Safety time 1 (TSA1) 1 Time Edit 1s 15 s 0.2 s 5s OEM
Fuel 1 oil: Time to respond to pressure faults within safety time 1 (TSA1) and safety
369 1 Time Edit 0.4 s 14.6 s 0.2 s 1.8 s OEM
time 2 (TSA2)
370 Fuel 1 oil: Interval 1 1 Time Edit 0.4 s 60 min 0.2 s 2s SO
371 Fuel 1 oil: Safety time 2 (TSA2) 1 Time Edit 1s 15 s 0.2 s 10 s OEM
372 Fuel 1 oil: Interval 2 1 Time Edit 0.4 s 60 min 0.2 s 2s SO
373 Fuel 1 oil: Afterburn time 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 60 s 0.2 s 8s SO
374 Fuel 1 oil: Postpurge time (no extraneous light test) 1 Time Edit 0.2 s 108 min 0.2 s 15 s SO
Fuel 1 oil: Pressure switch-min input
0 = inactive
376 1 Selection Edit 1 2 1 1 SO
1 = active from phase 38
2 = active from safety time (TSA)
Fuel 1 oil: Pressure switch-max / POC input
0 = inactive
377 1 Selection Edit 1 2 1 1 SO
1 = pressure switch-max
2 = POC
Fuel 1 oil: Forced intermittent operation
379 0 = inactive 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 SO
1 = active
Repetition limit value loss of flame
380 1 = no repetition 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 2 1 1 OEM
2 = 1 repetition
Fuel 1 oil: Point in time oil is ignited
381 0 = short preignition (Ph38) 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 0 SO
1 = long preignition (with fan) (Ph22)
384 Fuel 1 oil: Postpurge time 3 (abortion if load controller ON) 1 Time Edit 1s 108 min 0.2 s 1s SO

215/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
 Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level
no. LMV36... elements Min Max setting
400 Ratio curves
401 Ratio control curves fuel actuator (curve setting only) 13 Std_s16 Edit 0° 90 ° 0.1 ° 0 °; 0 °; 15 °; undefined SO
402 Ratio control curves air actuator (curve setting only) 13 Std_s16 Edit 0° 90 ° 0.1 ° 0 °; 90 °; 45 °; undefined SO
403 Ratio control curves VSD (curve setting only) 13 Std_s16 Edit 20% 100% 0.1% 0%; 100%; 50%; unde- SO
fined
404 Fuel 1: Ratio control curves fuel actuator (curve setting only) 13 Std_s16 Edit 0° 90° 0.1° 0°, 0°, 15°, undefined SO
405 Fuel 1: Ratio control curves air actuator (curve setting only) 13 Std_s16 Edit 0° 90° 0.1° 0°, 90°, 45°, undefined SO
406 Fuel 1: Ratio control curves VSD (curve setting only) 13 Std_s16 Edit 20 % 100 % 0.1 % 0 %, 100 %, 50 %, unde- SO
fined

216/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level
no. LMV36... elements Min Max setting
500 Ratio control
501 No-flame positions fuel actuator 3 Std_s16 Edit 0° 90 ° 0.1 ° 0 °; 0 °; 15 ° SO
Index 0 = home position
Index 1 = prepurge position
Index 2 = postpurge position
502 No-flame positions air actuator 3 Std_s16 Edit 0° 90 ° 0.1 ° 0 °; 90 °; 45 ° SO
Index 0 = home position
Index 1 = prepurge position
Index 2 = postpurge position
503 No-flame speeds VSD 3 Std_s16 Edit 0% 100% 0.1% 0%; 100%; 50% SO
Index 0 = no-load speed
Index 1 = prepurge speed
Index 2 = postpurge speed
504 Fuel 1: No-flame position fuel actuator 3 Std_s16 Edit 0° 90° 0.1° 0°, 0°, 15° SO
Index 0 = home position
Index 1 = prepurge position
Index 2 = postpurge position
505 Fuel 1: No-flame position air actuator 3 Std_s16 Edit 0° 90° 0.1° 0°, 90°, 45° SO
Index 0 = home position
Index 1 = prepurge position
Index 2 = postpurge position
506 Fuel 1: No-flame speed VSD 3 Std_s16 Edit 0% 100 % 0.1 % 0 %, 100 %, 50 % SO
Index 0 = no-load speed
Index 1 = prepurge speed
Index 2 = postpurge speed
522 Ramp up 1 Std_u8 Edit 5s 20 s 1s 10 s SO
523 Ramp down 1 Std_u8 Edit 5s 20 s 1s 10 s SO
542 Activation of VSD / PWM fan 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 0 SO
0 = inactive
1 = active
545 Lower output limit 1 Output Edit / clear 20% 100% 0.1% undefined SO (BA)
undefined = 20 %

217/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level
no. LMV36... elements Min Max setting
546 Upper output limit 1 Output Edit / clear 20% 100% 0.1% undefined SO (BA)
undefined = 100 %
565 Fuel 1: Lower output limit 1 Output Edit 20 % 100 % 0.1 % Undefined SO (BA)
undefined = 20 %
566 Fuel 1: Upper output limit 1 Output Edit 20 % 100 % 0.1 % Undefined SO (BA)
undefined = 100 %

218/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level
no. LMV36... elements Min Max setting
600 Actuators
601 Selection of reference point 2 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1; 0 OEM
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
0 = closed (<0°)
1 = open (>90°)
602 Actuator's direction of rotation 2 Selection Edit 0 1 1 0; 0 OEM
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
0 = counterclockwise
1 = clockwise (exclusively for SQM3...)
606 Tolerance limit of position monitoring [0.1°] 2 Std_u8 Edit 0.5 ° 4° 0,1° 1.7°; 1.7° SO
Index 0 = fuel Password level
Index 1 = air write: OEM
Greatest position error where a fault is securely detected
→ error detection band: (P606-0.6°) to P606
608 Fuel 1: Selection of reference point 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 1 1 1 OEM
0 = closed (<0°)
1 = open (>90°)
609 Fuel 1: Actuator's direction of rotation 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 1 1 0 OEM
0 = counterclockwise
1 = clockwise (exclusively for SQM3...)
610 Fuel 1: Tolerance limit of position monitoring (0.1°) 1 Std_u8 Edit 0° 4° 0.1° 1.7° SO
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
Greatest position error where an error is securely detected
→ Error detection band: (P606 -0.6°) up to P606
611 Type of reference 2 Std_u8 Edit 0 3 1 0; 0 OEM
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
0 = standard
1 = range stop in the usable range
2 = internal range stop (SQN1…)
3 = both

219/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level
no. LMV36... elements Min Max setting
612 Fuel 1: Type of reference for fuel actuator 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 3 1 0 OEM
0 = standard
1 = range stop in the usable range
2 = internal range stop (SQN1…)
3 = both
641 Control of speed standardization of VSD 1 Std_s8 Edit -25 1 1 0 SO
Error diagnostics of negative values (refer to error code
82)
0 = no speed standardization
1 = speed standardization active
642 Standardized speed 2 Std_u16 Read only 650 6500 0.1 undefined SO
Index 0 = speed 1
Index 1 = speed 2 (internal monitoring)
645 Configuration of analog output 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 2 1 0 SO
0 = DC 0...10 V
1 = DC 2...10 V
2 = DC 0/2...10 V

220/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level
no. LMV36... elements Min Max setting
700 Error history
701 Error history: 701-725.01.Code 25 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 Info / Service
• Error history: 701-725.02.Diagnostic code 25 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 Info / Service
• Error history: 701-725.03.Error class 25 Std_u8 Read only 0 6 1 0 Info / Service
• Error history: 701-725.04.Phase 25 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 Info / Service
• Error history: 701-725.05.Startup counter 25 Std_s32 Read only 0 99999999 1 0 Info / Service
• Error history: 701-725.06.Output 25 Output Read only 0% 100% 0.1% 0% Info / Service
725 Error history: 701-725.07.Fuel 25 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 Info / Service

221/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level
no. LMV36... elements Min Max setting
900 Process data
903 Current output 2 Output Read only 0% 100% 0.1% 0% Info / Service
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
922 Incremental position of actuators 2 Std_s16 Read only -50° 150° 0.01° 0° Info / Service
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
935 Absolute speed 1 Std_u16 Read only 0 6553.5 0.1 0 SO
936 Standardized speed 1 Std_s16 Read only -200% 200% 0.1% 0% Info / Service
942 Active load source 1 Selection Read only 0 255 1 0 SO
1 = output during curve settings
2 = manual output
3 = default output via building automation
4 = default output via analog input
5 = external load controller via contacts
945 Actual fuel 1 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 Info / Service
0 = fuel 0
1 = fuel 1
947 Results of contact release (bit-coded) 2 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 Info / Service
Bit 0.0 = 1: pressure switch-min
Bit 0.1 = 2: pressure switch-max
Bit 0.2 = 4: pressure switch valve proving
Bit 0.3 = 8: pressure switch air pressure switch
Bit 0.4 = 16: internal fuel selection 1
Bit 0.5 = 32: load controller ON
Bit 0.6 = 64: internal fuel selection 0
Bit 0.7 = 128: safety loop
Bit 1.0 = 1: safety valve
Bit 1.1 = 2: ignition
Bit 1.2 = 4: fuel valve 1
Bit 1.3 = 8: fuel valve 2
Bit 1.4 = 16: fuel valve 3 / pilot valve
Bit 1.5 = 32: reset
222/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Resolution Default Password level
no. LMV36... elements Min Max setting
950 Required relay state (bit-coded) 1 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 Info / Service
Bit 0 = 1: Alarm
Bit 1 = 2: Safety valve
Bit 2 = 4: Ignition
Bit 3 = 8: Fuel valve 1
Bit 4 = 16: Fuel valve 2
Bit 5 = 32: Fuel valve 3 / pilot valve
954 Intensity of flame 1 Std_u8 Read only 0% 100% 1% 0% Info / Service
960 Actual flow rate (m³/h, l/h, ft³/h, gal/h) 1 Std_u16 Read only 0 6553.5 0.1 0 Info / Service
961 Phase (state for external module and display) 1 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 Info / Service
981 Error memory: Code 1 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 Info / Service
982 Error memory: Diagnostic code 1 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 Info / Service
992 Error flags 10 Hex_32 Reset 0 0xFFFFFFFF 1 0 SO

Legend

Std_u8 8 bit integer, not signed

Std_u16 16 bit integer, not signed
Std_u32 32 bit integer, not signed
Std_s8 8 bit integer, signed

& Note
This data type is also used to mark an invalid or non-signed value by using the value of -1!
Std_s16 16 Bit integer, signed

& Note
This data type is also used to mark an invalid or non-signed value by using the value of -1!
Std_s32 32 Bit integer, signed

& Note
This data type is also used to mark an invalid or non-signed value by using the value of -1!

223/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 28 Parameter list LMV36... 15.10.2010
29 Error code list
Error
Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV36... system Remedy
code
no No communication between LMV36... basic unit and
Check wiring for line interruption/loose contact
Comm AZL2...
2 # No flame at the end of safety time (TSA)
1 No flame at the end of safety time 1 (TSA1)
2 No flame at the end of safety time 2 (TSA2)
3 # Air pressure failure
0 Air pressure off
1 Air pressure on
4 Air pressure on – prevention of startup
20 Air pressure, combustion pressure – start prevention
68 Air pressure, POC – start prevention
Air pressure, combustion pressure, POC – start preven-
84
tion
4 # Extraneous light
0 Extraneous light during startup
1 Extraneous light during shutdown
2 Extraneous light during startup – prevention of startup
Extraneous light during startup, air pressure – start pre-
6
vention
Extraneous light during startup, combustion pressure –
18
start prevention
Extraneous light during startup, air pressure, combus-
24
tion pressure – start prevention
66 Extraneous light during startup, POC – start prevention
Extraneous light during startup, air pressure, POC –
70
start prevention
Extraneous light during startup, combustion pressure,
82
POC – start prevention
Extraneous light during startup, air pressure, combus-
86
tion pressure, POC – start prevention

224/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 29 Error code list 15.10.2010
Error
Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV36... system Remedy
code
7 # Loss of flame
0 Loss of flame
Diagnostics corresponds to the period of time from shutdown of fuel valves to the detection of loss
3...255 Loss of flame due to TÜV test (loss-of-flame test)
of flame (resolution 0.2 s → Value 5 = 1 s)
12 # Valve proving
Check to see if valve on the gas side is leaking
0 Fuel valve 1 (V1) leaking
Check to see if there is a line interruption
Check to see if valve on the burner side is leaking
1 Fuel valve 2 (V2) leaking Check to see if pressure switch for the valve proving is closed when gas pressure is present
Check wiring to see if there is a short-circuit
Valve proving activated, but DWmin selected as input function for X9-04 (check parameters 238
2 Valve proving not possible
and 241)
3 Valve proving not possible Valve proving activated, but no input assigned (check parameters 236 and 237)
4 Valve proving not possible Valve proving activated, but 2 inputs assigned (set parameter 237 to DWmax or POC)
5 Valve proving not possible Valve proving activated, but 2 inputs assigned (check parameters 236 and 237)
14 # POC
0 POC open Check to see if the valve’s closing contact is closed
Check wiring
1 POC closed
Check to see if the valve’s closing contact opens when valve is controlled
Check wiring to see if there is a line interruption.
64 POC open – prevention of startup
Check to see if the valve’s closing contact is closed
Check to see if pressure switch has closed with no combustion pressure present
19 80 Combustion pressure, POC – start prevention
Check wiring for short-circuit
20 # Pressure switch-min (Pmin)
0 No minimum gas / oil pressure Check wiring for line interruption
1 Gas shortage / prevention of startup Check wiring for line interruption
Pressure switch-max (Pmax): Max. gas / oil pressure Check wiring to see if there is a line interruption.
21 0
exceeded POC: Check to see if the valve’s closing contact is closed.

225/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 29 Error code list 15.10.2010
Error
Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV36... system Remedy
code
22
# Safety loop / burner flange
OFF S
0 Safety loop / burner flange open
1 Safety loop / burner flange open / prevention of startup
Safety loop/burner flange, extraneous light – start pre-
3
vention
Safety loop/burner flange, air pressure – start preven-
5
tion
Safety loop/burner flange, combustion pressure – start
17
prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, extraneous light, combustion
19
pressure – start prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, air pressure, combustion
21
pressure – start prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, extraneous light, air pressure,
23
combustion pressure – start prevention
65 Safety loop/burner flange, POC – start prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, extraneous light, POC – start
67
prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, air pressure, POC – start
69
prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, extraneous light, air pressure,
71
POC – start prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, combustion pressure, POC –
81
start prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, extraneous light, combustion
83
pressure, POC – start prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, air pressure, combustion
85
pressure, POC – start prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, extraneous light, air pressure,
87
combustion pressure, POC – start prevention
50 # Internal error Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
51 # Internal error Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
55 # Internal error Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
56 # Internal error Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
57 # Internal error Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit

226/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 29 Error code list 15.10.2010
Error
Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV36... system Remedy
code
58 # Internal error Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
60 # Internal error: No valid heat source
1 Analog output preset valid – prevention of startup Check wiring of analog predefined output to see if there is an open-circuit / loose contact
Check wiring of analog predefined output to see if there is an open-circuit / loose contact
Note:
2 Analog output preset valid – default output low-fire
& This information is provided in connection with the thermal shock protection function
(manual interruption of 4...20 mA analog input)
61 Fuel Chg # Fuel changeover
Fuel Chg 0 Fuel 0 No error - change to Fuel 0
Fuel Chg 1 Fuel 1 No error - change to Fuel 1
62 Fuel Err # Invalid fuel signals / fuel information
Check wiring to see if there is an open-circuit
Fuel Err 0 Invalid fuel selection (Fuel 0 + 1 = 0)
& Note
Curves cannot be set
Fuel Err 1 Different fuel selection between the µCs Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
Fuel Err 2 Different fuel signals between the µCs Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
Check wiring for short-circuit
Note
Fuel Err 3 Invalid fuel selection (Fuel 0 + 1 = 1)
& Curves cannot be set.
LMV36...: Optional press reset button >3 seconds.
65 # Internal error Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
66 # Internal error Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
67 # Internal error Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
Internal error fuel-air ratio control: Position calculation
70 #
modulating
23 Output invalid No valid output
26 Curvepoints undefined Adjust the curvepoints for all actuators
71 # Special position undefined
0 Home position Parameterize the home position for all actuators used
1 Prepurge position Parameterize the prepurge position for all actuators used
2 Postpurge position Parameterize the postpurge position for all actuators used
3 Ignition position Parameterize the ignition position for all actuators used
72 # Internal error fuel-air ratio control Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit

227/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 29 Error code list 15.10.2010
Error
Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV36... system Remedy
code
Internal error fuel-air ratio control: Position calcula-
73 #
tion multistep
23 Output invalid No valid output
26 Curvepoints undefined Adjust the curvepoints for all actuators
Internal error fuel-air ratio control: Data clocking
75 #
check
1 Current output different
2 Target output different
4 Target positions different
Can be caused by different standardized speeds (e.g. after restore of data set) when the VSD is
16 Different positions reached
activated → standardize again and check adjustment of the fuel-air ratio control system
76 # Internal error fuel-air control Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
Basic unit could not correct the difference in speed and reached a control range limit.
1. Basic unit is not standardized for this motor → repeat standardization.
Caution!
Settings of fuel-air ratio control must be checked!

80 # Control range limitation of VSD 2. Ramp time settings of the VSD are not shorter than those of the basic unit (parameters 522,
523).
3. Characteristic of the VSD is not linear. Configuration of the voltage input at the VSD must
accord with that of the basic unit (parameter 645).
4. VSD does not follow quickly enough the changes of the basic unit. Check settings of the VSD
(input filter, slippage compensation, hiding different speeds)
1 Control range limitation at the bottom VSD speed was too high
2 Control range limitation at the top VSD speed was too low
Too much electromagnetic interference on the sensor line
81 1 Interrupt limitation speed input
→ improve EMC

228/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 29 Error code list 15.10.2010
Error
Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV36... system Remedy
code
82 # Error during VSD’s speed standardization
Timeout of standardization (VSD ramp down time too Timeout at the end of standardization during ramp down of the VSD
1
long) → Ramp time settings of the VSD are not shorter than those of the basic unit (parameter: 523)
Error during storage of the standardized speed
2 Storage of standardized speed not successful
→ lock the basic unit, then reset it and repeat the standardization
Basic unit receives no pulses from the speed sensor:
1. Motor does not turn.
3 Line interruption speed sensor
2. Speed sensor is not connected.
3. Speed sensor is not activated by the sensor disk (check distance)
Motor has not reached a stable speed after ramp up.
1. Ramp time settings of the VSD are not shorter than those of the basic unit (parameters 522,
523).
Speed variation / VSD ramp up time too long / speed 2. Characteristic of the VSD is not linear. Configuration of the voltage input at the VSD must
4
below minimum limit for standardization accord with that of the basic unit (parameter 645).
3. VSD does not follow quickly enough the changes of the basic unit. Check settings of the VSD
(input filter, slippage compensation, hiding different speeds)
4. Speed of VSD lies below the minimum for standardization (650 1/min)
Motor’s direction of rotation is wrong.
1. Motor turns indeed in the wrong direction
5 Wrong direction of rotation → change parameterization of the direction of rotation or interchange 2 live conductors.
2. Sensor disk is fitted the wrong way
→ turn the sensor disk.
The required pulse pattern (60°, 120°, 180°) has not been correctly identified.
1. Speed sensor does not detect all tappets of the sensor disk
→ check distance
6 Unplausible sensor signals 2. As the motor turns, other metal parts are detected also, in addition to the tappets → improve
mounting.
3. Electromagnetic interference on the sensor lines
→ check cable routing, improve EMC
The standardized speed measured does not lie in the permissible range.
7 Invalid standardized speed
→ Motor turns too slowly or too fast.
The speeds of microcomputer 1 and 2 deviated too much. This can be caused by wrong standard-
15 Speed deviation µC1 + µC2 ized speeds (e.g. after restoring a data set to a new unit) → repeat standardization and check the
fuel-air ratio

229/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 29 Error code list 15.10.2010
Error
Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV36... system Remedy
code
Standardization was made in a wrong phase. Permitted are only phases ≤12 → controller OFF,
20 Wrong phase of phase manager
start standardization again
21 Safety loop / burner flange open Safety loop or burner flange is open → repeat standardization with safety loop closed
Air actuator has not been referenced or has lost its referencing.
1. Check if the reference position can be approached.
22 Air actuator not referenced 2. Check if actuators have been mixed up.
3. If error only occurs after the start of standardization, the actuator might be overloaded and
cannot reach its destination.
Standardization was started with VSD deactivated
23 VSD deactivated
→ activate the VSD and repeat standardization
Standardization was started without valid operation mode
24 No valid operation mode
→ activate valid operation mode and repeat standardization
Standardization was started with pneumatic air-fuel ratio control
25 Pneumatic air-fuel ratio control
→ standardization with pneumatic air-fuel ratio control not possible
VSD is controlled but not standardized
128 Running command with no preceding standardization
→ make standardization
Motor turns but is not standardized
255 No standardized speed available
→ make standardization

230/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 29 Error code list 15.10.2010
Error
Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV36... system Remedy
code
83 # Speed error VSD Required speed has not been reached
Bit 0 Speed has not been reached because control range limitation has become active
Lower control range limitation of control
Valency 1 → for measures, refer to error code 80
Bit 1 Speed has not been reached because control range limitation has become active
Upper control range limitation of control
Valency 2...3 → for measures, refer to error code 80
Bit 2 Speed has not been reached due to too much electromagnetic interference on the sensor line
Interruption via disturbance pulses
Valency 4...7 → for measures, refer to error code 81
Speed has not been reached because detected curve slope was too steep.
1. With a LMV36... ramp of 20 s, the curve’s slope may be a maximum of 10% speed change
between 2 curvepoints in modulating mode.
With a LMV36... ramp of 10 s, the curve’s slope may be a maximum of 20% speed change
between 2 curvepoints in modulating mode.
Bit 3
Curve too steep in terms of ramp speed With a LMV36... ramp of 5 s, the curve’s slope may be a maximum of 40% speed change
Valency ≥ 8
between 2 curvepoints in modulating mode.
→ Between the ignition point (P0) and the low-fire point (P1), the speed change in modulating
mode may be a maximum of 40%, independent of the LMV36... ramp.
2. The setting of the VSD ramp must be about 20% faster than the ramps in the basic unit
(parameters 522, 523).
No speed detected in spite of control.
Bit 4 1. Check if the motor turns.
Interruption of speed signal
Valency ≥ 16 2. Check if the speed sensor delivers a signal (LED / check distance from the sensor disk).
3. Check wiring of the VSD.
Speed deviation was for about 1 s >10% outside the anticipated range.
Bit 5
Quick shutdown due to excessive speed deviation 1. Check ramp times of the LMV36... and VSD.
Valency ≥ 32
2. Check wiring of the VSD.

231/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 29 Error code list 15.10.2010
Error
Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV36... system Remedy
code
84 # Curve slope actuators
1. The curve's slope may be a maximum of 10% speed change between 2 curvepoints in
modulating operation, with a LMV36... ramp of 20 seconds
The curve's slope may be a maximum of 20% speed change between 2 curvepoints in
modulating operation, with a LMV36... ramp of 10 seconds
Bit 0 The curve's slope may be a maximum of 40% speed change between 2 curvepoints in
VSD: Curve too steep in terms of ramp speed
Valency 1 modulating operation, with a LMV36... ramp of 5 seconds
→ Between the ignition point (P0) and the low-fire point (P1), the speed change in modulating
mode may be a maximum of 40%, independent of the LMV36... ramp.
2. Setting of the VSD ramp must be about 20% shorter than the ramps in the basic unit
(parameters 522 and 523)
Bit 1 The slope of the curve may be a maximum position change of 31° between 2 curvepoints in
Fuel actuator: Curve too steep in terms of ramp rate
Valency 2..3 modulating mode
Bit 2 The slope of the curve may be a maximum position change of 31° between 2 curvepoints in
Air actuator: Curve too steep in terms of ramp rate
Valency 4..7 modulating mode
85 # Referencing error ones actuators
Referencing of fuel actuator not successful.
Reference point could not be reached.
0 Referencing error of fuel actuator
1. Check to see if actuators have been mixed up
2. Check to see if actuator is locked or overloaded
Referencing of fuel actuator not successful
Reference point could not be reached.
1 Referencing error of air actuator
1. Check to see if actuators have been mixed up
2. Check to see if actuator is locked or overloaded
Bit 7 Parameterization of an actuator (e.g. the reference position) has been changed.
Referencing error due to parameter change
Valency ≥ 128 To trigger new referencing, this error is set
86 # Error fuel actuator
Target position could not be reached within the required tolerance band.
0 Position error
→ Check to see if actuator is locked or overloaded.
Bit 0 Line interruption detected at actuator’s terminals.
Line interruption
Valency 1 → Check wiring (voltage X54 across pin 5 or 6 and pin 2 >0.5 V).
Bit 3 The slope of the curve may be a maximum position change of 31° between 2 curvepoints in
Curve too steep in terms of ramp rate
Valency ≥8 modulating mode
Actuator was overloaded or mechanically twisted.
Bit 4
Step deviation in comparison with last referencing 1. Check to see if the actuator is blocked somewhere along its working range.
Valency ≥ 16
2. Check to see if the torque is sufficient for the application.
232/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 29 Error code list 15.10.2010
Error
Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV36... system Remedy
code
87 # Error air actuator
Target position could not be reached within the required tolerance band.
0 Position error
→ Check to see if actuator is locked or overloaded.
Bit 0 Line interruption detected at actuator’s terminals.
Line interruption
Valency 1 → Check wiring (voltage X53 across pin 5 or 6 and pin 2 >0.5 V).
Bit 3 The slope of the curve may be a maximum position change of 31° between 2 curvepoints in
Curve too steep in terms of ramp rate
Valency ≥ 8 modulating mode
Actuator was overloaded or mechanically twisted.
Bit 4
Sectional deviation in comparison with last referencing 1. Check to see if the actuator is blocked somewhere along its working range.
Valency ≥ 16
2. Check to see if the torque is sufficient for the application.
90 # Internal error basic unit
91 # Internal error basic unit
93 # Error flame signal acquisition
Short-circuit at QRB...
3 Short-circuit of sensor 1. Check wiring.
2. Flame detector possibly fault.
95 # Error relay supervision
3 Ignition transformer
4 Fuel valve 1
External power supply NO contact Check wiring
5 Fuel valve 2
6 Fuel valve 3
96 # Error relay supervision
Test the contacts:
3 Ignition transformer 1. Unit connected to power: Fan output must be dead.
4 Fuel valve 1 2. Disconnect power: Disconnect fan. No resistive connection between fan output and neutral
Relay contacts have welded
5 Fuel valve 2 conductor allowed.
6 Fuel valve 3 If one of the 2 tests fails, release the unit since contact have definitively welded and safety can no
longer be ensured.
97 # Error relay supervision
Test the contacts:
1. Unit connected to power: Fan output must be dead.
Safety relay contacts have welded or external power 2. Disconnect power: Disconnect fan. No resistive connection between fan output and neutral
0
supply fed to safety relay conductor allowed.
If one of the 2 tests fails, release the unit since contacts have definitively welded and safety can
no longer be ensured.

233/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 29 Error code list 15.10.2010
Error
Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV36... system Remedy
code
98 # Error relay supervision
2 Safety valve
3 Ignition transformer
4 Fuel valve 1 Relay does not pull in Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
5 Fuel valve 2
6 Fuel valve 3
99 # Internal error relay control Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
Make a reset. If error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
Software version V03.10: If error C:99 D:3 occurs during standardization of the VSD, deactivate
3 Internal error relay control
temporarily function Alarm in case of start prevention (parameter number 210 = 0, when using a
release contact) or interrupt the controller-ON signal
100 # Internal error relay control Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
105 # Internal error contact sampling
0 Pressure switch-min
1 Pressure switch-max / POC
2 Pressure switch valve proving
3 Air pressure
4 Fuel selection Fuel 1
5 Load controller on / off
6 Fuel selection Fuel 0 Can be caused by capacitive loads or supply of DC voltage to the mains voltage inputs. The diag-
Stuck-At failure
7 Safety loop / Burner flange nostic code indicates the input where the problem occurred
8 Safety valve
9 Ignition transformer
10 Fuel valve 1
11 Fuel valve 2
12 Fuel valve 3
13 Reset
106 # Internal error contact request Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
107 # Internal error contact request Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
108 # Internal error contact request Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
110 # Internal error voltage monitor test Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
Mains voltage to low
111 # Power failure
Exchange ratio diagnostics code → voltage value (120 V: 0.843)
112 0 Mains voltage recovery Error code for triggering a reset on power restoration (no error)
113 # Internal error mains voltage supervision Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
115 # Internal error system counter
116 0 Designed life time exceeded (250´000 startups) Warning threshold has been reached. The unit should be replaced
234/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 29 Error code list 15.10.2010
Error
Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV36... system Remedy
code
Life time exceeded
117 0 Switch-off threshold has been reached
Operation no longer allowed
Too many disturbance pulses at the fuel meters input
120 0 Interrupt limitation fuel meter input
→ Improve EMC
Make a reset, repeat last parameterization / check. Restore the parameter set, if error occurs re-
121 # Internal error EEPROM access
peatedly, replace the unit
Make a reset, repeat last parameterization / check. Restore the parameter set, if error occurs re-
122 # Internal error EEPROM access
peatedly, replace the unit
Make a reset, repeat last parameterization / check. Restore the parameter set, if error occurs re-
123 # Internal error EEPROM access
peatedly, replace the unit
Make a reset, repeat last parameterization / check. Restore the parameter set, if error occurs re-
124 # Internal error EEPROM access
peatedly, replace the unit
125 # Internal error EEPROM read access Make a reset, repeat last parameterization / check. If error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
126 # Internal error EEPROM write access Make a reset, repeat last parameterization / check. If error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
Make a reset, repeat last parameterization / check. Restore the parameter set, if error occurs re-
127 # Internal error EEPROM access
peatedly, replace the unit
Internal error EEPROM access - synchronization during
128 0 Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
initialization
Internal error EEPROM access – command syn-
129 # Make a reset, repeat last parameterization / check. If error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
chronization
130 # Internal error EEPROM access - timeout Make a reset, repeat last parameterization / check. If error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
131 # Internal error EEPROM access - page on abort Make a reset, repeat last parameterization / check. If error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
132 # Internal error EEPROM register initialization Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
Internal error EEPROM access – Request synchro-
133 # Make a reset, repeat last parameterization / check. If error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
nization
Internal error EEPROM access – Request synchro-
134 # Make a reset, repeat last parameterization / check. If error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
nization
Internal error EEPROM access – Request synchro-
135 # Make a reset, repeat last parameterization / check. If error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
nization
136 1 Restore started Restore of a backup has been started (no error)

235/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 29 Error code list 15.10.2010
Error
Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV36... system Remedy
code
137 # Internal error – backup / restore
157 (-99) Restore – ok, but backup < data set of current system Restore successful, but backup data record is smaller than in the current system
239 (-17) Backup – storage of backup in AZL2... faulty Reset and repeat backup
240 (-16) Restore – no backup in AZL2... No backup stored in AZL2...
241 (-15) Restore – abortion due to unsuitable product no. (ASN) Backup has an unsuitable product no. (ASN) and must not be restored
242 (-14) Backup – backup made is inconsistent Backup is faulty and cannot be transferred back
243 (-13) Backup – data comparison between µCs faulty Reset and repeat backup
244 (-12) Backup data are incompatible Backup data are incompatible with the current software version, restore not possible
245 (-11) Access error to parameter Restore_Complete Reset and repeat backup
246 (-10) Restore – timeout when storing in EEPROM Reset and repeat backup
247 (-9) Data received are inconsistent Backup data record invalid, restore not possible
248 (-8) Restore cannot at present be made Reset and repeat backup
Restore – abortion due to unsuitable burner identifica-
249 (-7) Backup has an unsuitable burner identification and must not be transferred to the unit
tion
250 (-6) Backup – CRC of one page is not correct Backup data record invalid, restore not possible
251 (-5) Backup – burner identification is not defined Define burner identification and repeat backup
252 (-4) After restore, pages still on ABORT Reset and repeat backup
253 (-3) Restore cannot at present be made Reset and repeat backup
254 (-2) Abortion due to transmission error Reset and repeat backup
Make a reset, check the connections and repeat backup / restore
255 (-1) Abortion due to timeout during backup / restore
In case of repeated backup timeout, the AZL2... does not yet support backup functionality
146 # Timeout building automation interface Refer to Modbus User Documentation (A7541)
1 Modbus timeout
2 reserved
150 # TÜV test
1 (-1) Invalid phase TÜV test may only be started in phase 60 (operation)
2 (-2) TÜV test default output too low TÜV test default output must not be smaller than the lower output limit
3 (-3) TÜV test default output too high TÜV test default output must not be greater than the upper output limit
4 (-4) Manual interruption No error: Manual abortion of TÜV test by user
No loss of flame after shutdown of fuel valves
1. Check to see if there is extraneous light
5 (-5) TÜV test timeout
2. Check wiring to see if there is a short-circuit
Check to see if valve is leaking

236/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 29 Error code list 15.10.2010
Error
Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV36... system Remedy
code
165 # Internal error
166 0 Internal error watchdog reset
167 # Manual locking Unit has been manually locked (no error)
1 Manual locking by contact
2 Manual locking by AZL2...
3 Manual locking by PC tool
Manual locking by the AZL2... During a curve adjustment via the AZL2..., the timeout for menu operation has elapsed (setting
8
Timeout / communication breakdown via parameter 127), or communication between the LMV36... and the AZL2... has broken down
Manual locking by the PC tool During a curve adjustment via the ACS410, communication between the LMV36... and the
9
Communication breakdown ACS410 was interrupted for more than 30 seconds
Manual locking by the PC tool
33 PC tool made a reset attempt with an error-free system
Test of lockout
168 # Internal error management Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
169 # Internal error management Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
170 # Internal error management Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
171 # Internal error management Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
200 OFF # System error-free No error
Start prevention due to unparameterized unit
201 OFF UPr0
# Prevention of startup Go to error history, entry 702, for initial cause of the error with shutdown in connection with the
or OFF UPr1
first curve settings
Bit 0
No operating mode selected
Valency 1
Bit 1
No fuel train defined
Valency 2..3
Bit 2
No curves defined
Valency 4..7
Bit 3
Standardized speed undefined
Valency 8..15
Bit 4
Backup / restore was not possible
Valency 16..31
202 # Internal error operating mode selection Redefine the operating mode (parameter 201)
Redefine the operating mode (parameter 201).
203 # Internal error
Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit

237/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 29 Error code list 15.10.2010
Error
Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV36... system Remedy
code
204 Phase number Program stop Program stop is active (no error)
205 # Internal error Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
206 0 Inadmissible combination of units (basic unit – AZL2...)
207 # Version compatibility basic unit – AZL2...
0 Basic unit version too old
1 AZL2... version too old
208 # Internal error Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
209 # Internal error Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
Selected operation mode is not released for the basic
210 0 Select a released operation mode for the basic unit
unit
240 # Internal error Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
245 # Internal error Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit
250 # Internal error Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the unit

238/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 29 Error code list 15.10.2010
 30 Revision history of basic unit LMV36...
Software changes Software version V03.00

• Optimization: Maximum time of safety phase reduced from 28 to 27 seconds

• Optimization: Correction of error diagnostics C:61 D:0 or 1 (Fuel Chg)
• Optimization: No error Fuel Err when pressing the reset button for a short moment
after a reset / power-on
• Parameter 376: Deactivation of oil pressure switch-min for fuel 1

Software version V03.10

• Optimization: If power supply fails during the restore process, the data set can be
repaired by starting a new restore process (since the backup / restore option is not
yet available with V03.00 because there is no suitable AZL2..., this effect cannot
occur)
• Optimization: If the analog input is interrupted, error C:60 (no valid output source) is
canceled or reset when Default output low-fire is parameterized (only with LMV36...)
• Optimization: When making a reset via the AZL2..., an incomplete reset occurred in
very rare cases (display showed RESEt, but reset was not triggered)
• Optimization: The time of 0.2 seconds ascertained by the loss-of-flame test was too
long
• Optimization: No continuous purging with the LMV36... (in prepurge / ignition posi-
tion) during the gas shortage waiting time when using a VSD and valve proving via
gas pressure switch-min
• Optimization: With fuel changeover, error codes C:85 / C:86 do not occur any more
• Optimization: Reduced detection of undervoltage when fan motor is started in phase
22 (when a single-phase motor and the LMV37.8… 120 V were powered via the
same phase, undervoltage detection could occur on startup; in that case, the
LMV37.8… system was not operated as specified)
• Optimization: Better overview through text changes of groups 200 = PAr0, 300 =
PAr1 and 600 = ACtr on the parameter menu (initially PArA), and hiding of unused
parameters after selection of fuel train / operating mode
• Optimization: Control of the fan output during standardization (standby) for using a
release contact via an external relay at the fan’s output
• Optimization: Curve setting invalid (OFF UPr) after new / further standardization
• Optimization: To shorten the startup time, there is no referencing when postpurging
is aborted via controller-ON (direct start)
• Automatic return travel of the SQN1... at the lower internal stop
• Parameter on Siemens level
Longer ignition off time during safety time 1 (TSA1) (increased from 0.4 to 0.6 sec-
onds) to prevent wrong error diagnostics in connection with QRA2… (C:7 in place of
C:2)
• Parameter at the Siemens level:
Readjustment of threshold for detection of interruption based on operation with
AGM60... and 2 fuel actuators
• Creation of new parameter sets for the burner output test based on V01.05
(otherwise, due to a restore process with old data sets during the burner output test,
parameter changes at the safety limit thermostat level might be overwritten again)

Software version V03.30

• Extension: Display of intensity of flame when setting the curves

• Optimization: Display and diagnostics of changing start preventions
• Optimization: No unplausible relay setpoint (error C:99 D:3) when starting stan-
dardization, alarm in case of start prevention and controller-ON signal
• Optimization: No VSD standardization with pneumatic air-fuel ratio control
• Optimization: Referencing in connection with direction of rotation Right and home
position 90°
• Extension: Separate pressure switch valve proving via X5-02 (Pmax / POC)

239/242

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 15.10.2010
 31 List of figures

Figure 1: LMV36... note on mounting............................................................................ 15

Figure 2: AGM60... note for mounting........................................................................... 16

Figure 3: LMV36... electrical connection ....................................................................... 18

Figure 4: AGM60... electrical connection ...................................................................... 19

Figure 5: AGM60... lateral connecting area .................................................................. 19

Figure 6: AGM60... connected to the LMV36................................................................ 26

Figure 7: Fuel changeover ............................................................................................ 27

Figure 8: AGM60... extra fuel selector .......................................................................... 27

Figure 9: Ionization input at AC 120 V .......................................................................... 33

Figure 10: QRB… input at AC 120 V ............................................................................ 35

Figure 11: Dimensions of the LMV36............................................................................ 39

Figure 12: Dimensions of the AGM60... ........................................................................ 40

Figure 13: Flame signal input X10-05 ........................................................................... 41

Figure 14: Flame signal input X10-06 ........................................................................... 41

Figure 15: Safety loop (optional pressure switch-max (Pmax)) X3-04.......................... 45

Figure 16: Burner flange X3-03..................................................................................... 46

Figure 17: Inputs for external load controller ON / OFF X5-03 ..................................... 46

Figure 18: Air pressure switch (APS) X3-02 ................................................................. 47

Figure 19: LMV36…: Pressure switch valve proving gas (P LT) X9-04 ........................ 48

Figure 20: LMV36… with AGM60…: Pressure switch valve proving gas (P LT) X9-04 48

Figure 21: Gas pressure switch-min (Pmin) X5-01 ....................................................... 49

Figure 22: LMV36...: Oil pressure switch valve proving (P LT) X9-04 .......................... 50

Figure 23: LMV36... with AGM60...: Oil pressure switch valve proving (P LT) X9-04... 50

Figure 24: LMV36...: Gas / oil Pressure switch-max (Pmax) or POC X5-02................. 52

Figure 25: LMV36... with AGM60…: Gas / oil pressure switch-max (Pmax) or POC X5-
02 ........................................................................................................................... 52

Figure 26: LMV36... with AGM60…: Fuel selection ...................................................... 55

Figure 27: Reset X8-04 ................................................................................................. 55

Figure 28: Output alarm X3-05 ..................................................................................... 56

Figure 29: Fan motor contactor X3-05 .......................................................................... 56

Figure 30: Continuous fan operation X3-05 .................................................................. 56

Figure 31: Output ignition (Z) X4-02 ............................................................................. 57

Figure 32: LMV36...: Output fuel valve (V1) X8-02 ....................................................... 58

Figure 33: LMV36... with AGM60…: Output fuel valve (V1) X8-02 ............................... 58

Figure 34: LMV36...: Output fuel valve (V2) X7-01 ....................................................... 59

Figure 35: LMV36... with AGM60…: Output fuel valve (V2) X7-01 ............................... 59

240/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 31 List of figures 15.10.2010
 Figure 36: LMV36...: Output fuel valve (V3) / pilot valve PV X7-02 ...............................59

Figure 37: LMV36...: Output safety valve (SV) / magnetic clutch X6-03 .......................60

Figure 38: LMV36... with AGM60…: Output safety valve (SV) / magnetic clutch X6-0360

Figure 39: Output for indication of operation X8-04.......................................................60

Figure 40: Message in the case of program stop ..........................................................74

Figure 41: Continuous fan .............................................................................................75

Figure 42: Program for gas direct ignition (G), (G mod), (G mod pneu) ........................84

Figure 43: Program for gas pilot ignition (Gp1), (Gp1 mod), (Gp1 mod pneu) ..............85

Figure 44: Program for gas pilot ignition (Gp2), (Gp2 mod), (Gp2 mod pneu) ..............86

Figure 45: Program for light oil direct ignition (Lo), (Lo mod), (Lo 2-stage), (Lo 3-stage)
...............................................................................................................................87

Figure 46: Program light pilot ignition (Lo Gp) ...............................................................88

Figure 47: LMV36... with AGM60...: System with AGM60... and one fuel actuator .......91

Figure 48: LMV36... with AGM60...: System with AGM60... and two fuel actuator .......91

Figure 49: External load controller via analog input X64.1 / X64.2................................99

Figure 50: Definition of curves .....................................................................................104

Figure 51: Restriction of modulation range..................................................................106

Figure 52: Adjustment of output ..................................................................................109

Figure 53: Fuel actuator (X54).....................................................................................112

Figure 54: Air actuator (X53) .......................................................................................112

Figure 55: Angle definitions with SQM33… .................................................................115

Figure 56: Direction of rotation (example SQM3…).....................................................116

Figure 57: Function principle of fan control .................................................................121

Figure 58: Connection of VSD to the W-FM 50 ...........................................................122

Figure 59: Sensor disk.................................................................................................124

Figure 60: Speed sensor .............................................................................................125

Figure 61: VSD connection X74 ..................................................................................132

Figure 62: PWM fan X74 .............................................................................................132

Figure 63: PWM fan X64 .............................................................................................132

Figure 64: Fuel meter input X75 ..................................................................................135

Figure 65: Inputs and outputs ......................................................................................137

Figure 66: Connection via COM X92 to superposed systems .....................................139

Figure 67: Communication with display / BCI (RJ11 jack) (X56) .................................142

Figure 68: Display input / BCI (RJ11 jack) X56 ...........................................................142

Figure 69: Description of unit/display and buttons.......................................................146

Figure 70: Meaning of display .....................................................................................147

Figure 71: Assignment of levels ..................................................................................159

Fig. 72: Info level .........................................................................................................160

241/242

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 15.10.2010
 Figure 73: Service level .............................................................................................. 165

Figure 74: Setting the curvepoints .............................................................................. 191

Figure 75: Changing several curvepoints ................................................................... 197

Siemens AG Industry Sector Building Technologies Division © 2010 Siemens AG Industry Sector Building Technologies Division
Berliner Ring 23 Subject to change!
D-76437 Rastatt
Tel. 0049-7222-598-279
Fax 0049-7222-598-269
www.sbt.siemens.com

242/242

Building Technologies Division Basic documentation LMV36... CC1P7544en

Industry Sector 31 List of figures 15.10.2010